FCC ID: EHA-1000CP01CX2 1000CP01C-H1, 1000CP02C-H1, and 1001CP01C-H1

 

CK70 Mobile Computer Compliance Insert Model 1001CP01C-H1 For Users in English-Speaking Regions (en) Caution: This marking indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use. Retain this supplement for future reference. Users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. Battery and Power Supply Information Caution: For use with Intermec battery pack Model 1001AB01 only. See battery instructions. For power supply, use Intermec Model 9001AE02 or Model 9002AX02. No user-serviceable parts. Charge only in Intermec Models 1001CP01C or with base 1002UU01, 1002UU02, 1002UU03, 1002UU04, or 1002UU05 using 1002UC02 or 1002UD02 adapters. Use of incorrect charger may present a risk of fire or explosion. Promptly dispose of used battery pack according to the instructions. 802.11 Radio Precaution Statement Caution: Users are responsible for configuring the channels of operation that comply with their country regulatory standards. A Wireless Network Administrator should review the operating restrictions detailed within the Access Point installation manual. Radiation Exposure Statement Warning: This equipment complies with International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), IEEE C95.1, Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) Bulletin 65, Canada RSS-102, and European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC) limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) radiation. If a body worn accessory is not purchased from Intermec, the accessory must contain no metal and provide 1.50 cm (0.59 in) space between the device and the body. Use of antennas and accessories not authorized may void the compliance of this product and may result in RF exposure beyond the limits established for this equipment. To find RF exposure information, go to www.intermec.com > Products > Computers > Handheld Computers > CK70 > Manuals tab, and then scroll down to Regulatory Information. For Users in the U.S.A. and Canada Scan Engine and Camera Flash Compliance and Precautions This product is registered with the CDRH as a Class II laser Product (21 CFR Subchapter J, Part 1040). This product has a maximum output of 1 mW at 630-680 nm. Caution: Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein, may result in hazardous laser light exposure. Note: There are no controls or adjustments provided for routine operation or maintenance of the product. There are no user-serviceable parts inside this product. This product complies with IEC 62471 for LED safety. This product may use any of the following scan engines:

EA30 To find Laser and Imager classification information for scan engines used in Intermec products, go to www.intermec.com > Products >

Computers > Handheld Computers > CK70 > Manuals tab, and then scroll down to Regulatory Information. The camera assembly with flash is classified as: Risk Group 2. Caution: When using the camera flash, keep the camera flash LED at least 317 mm (12.5 in) away from the subjects eyes. Otherwise serious damage to ones eyes may occur. U.S.A. Digital Emissions Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Canadian Compliance This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3 (B) 802.11a Radio Precaution Statement Caution: 802.11a wireless LAN 5150 to 5250 MHz (5.15 to 5.25 GHz) (5 GHz radio channels 34 to 48) is restricted to indoor operations to reduce harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite System (MSS) operations. Caution: The maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250 to 5350 MHz and 5470 to 5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit. Caution: The maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725 to 5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate. Caution: Be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250 to 5350 MHz and 5650 to 5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Pour les utilisateurs canadiens (fr) Mise en garde : Cette marque indique que lutilisateur doit lire toute la documentation incluse avant lutilisation. Conservez ce supplment pour rfrence future. Les utilisateurs de ce produit sont mis en garde contre lutilisation daccessoires et de priphriques qui ne sont pas approuvs par Intermec Technologies Corporation. Lutilisation daccessoires autres que ceux recommands, ou des modifications ce produit qui ne sont pas approuves par Intermec Technologies Corporation, peuvent annuler la conformit de ce produit et avoir comme rsultat la perte de lautorit de lutilisateur faire fonctionner lquipement. Information sur les piles et le bloc dalimentation Mise en garde : Pour utilisation avec le bloc-piles Intermec 1001AB01 exclusivement. Voir les instructions pour les piles. Pour le bloc dalimentation CA, utiliser le modle Intermec 9001AE02 ou le modle 9002AX02. Aucune pice rparable par lutilisateur. Pour charger, utiliser uniquement le modles Intermec 1001CP01C ou les bases 1002UU01, 1002UU02, 1002UU03, 1002UU04 ou 1002UU05 avec les adaptateurs 1002UC02 ou 1002UD02. Lutilisation dun chargeur inappropri prsente un risque dincendie ou dexplosion. Mettre rapidement au rebut le bloc-piles usag, conformment aux instructions. 802.11 nonc de mise en garde radio Mise en garde : Il incombe aux utilisateurs de configurer les canaux de fonctionnement de manire ce quils se conforment aux normes rglementaires de leur pays. Ladministrateur dun rseau sans fil doit revoir les restrictions de fonctionnement indiques en dtail au manuel dinstallation du point daccs. nonc sur lexposition aux radiations Avertissement : Cet quipement est conforme la Commission internationale de protection contre les rayonnements non ionisants

(ICNIRP), la norme IEEE C95.1, au bulletin 65 de lOET (Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology), la norme Canada RSS-102 et aux limites Comit Europen de Normalisation lectrotechnique (CENELEC) dexposition des rayonnements radiolectriques. Si un accessoire de corps nest pas achet auprs dIntermec, cet accessoire ne doit contenir aucun mtal et garantir un espace de 1.50 cm entre lappareil et le corps. Lutilisation dantennes et daccessoires non autoriss peut annuler la conformit de cet appareil et peut causer une exposition aux RF au-del des limites tablies pour cet quipement. Pour obtenir de linformation sur lexposition aux RF, aller www.intermec.com > Products > Computers > Handheld Computers > CK70

> Manuals et descendre dans la liste jusqu Regulatory Information. Conformit et prcautions prendre avec le flash de la camra et l'imageur Ce produit est enregistr auprs du CDRH titre de produit LASER de Classe II (21 CFR sous-chapitre J, partie 1040). Ce produit a une puissance de sortie de 1 mW 630-680 nm. Mise en garde: Lutilisation de commandes, de rglages ou dinstructions autres que ceux spcifis prsente un risque dexposition dangereuse la lumire laser. Remarque: Aucune commande ni aucun rglage ne sont fournis pour les oprations ou lentretien de routine du produit. Ce produit ne contient aucune pice rparable par lutilisateur. Ce produit est conforme la norme IEC 62471 concernant la scurit des LED. Ce produit peut utiliser nimporte lequel des modules de lecture pour imageur/lecteur laser Intermec suivants :

EA30 Pour retrouver des informations sur la classification des modules de lecture Intermec pour lecteurs laser et imageurs, accder longlet www.intermec.com > Products > Computers > Handheld Computers > CK70 > Manuals et descendre dans la liste jusqu Regulatory Information. Le bloc camra et son flash sont classs comme tant de: Catgorie de risque2. Mise en garde : Lors de lutilisation du flash de la camra, ne pas approcher la LED du flash de la camra moins de 317 mm des yeux du sujet. Le non-respect de cette consigne pourrait entraner des lsions oculaires chez ce dernier. Conformit aux normes canadiennes sur les appareils numriques Ce priphrique est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence dIndustrie Canada. Lutilisation est assujettie aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) Ce dispositif ne doit pas causer dinterfrence dommageable et (2) Ce dispositif doit tolrer toute interfrence, incluant linterfrence pouvant causer un fonctionnement indsirable. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3 (B) 802.11a nonc de mise en garde radio Mise en garde: 802.11a sans fil LAN 5150 5250MHz (5,15 5,25GHz) (frquences radio34 48 de 5GHz) est limit aux oprations en intrieur pour rduire les interfrences nuisibles aux oprations du systme mobile par satellite (MSS) dans le mme canal. Mise en garde: Le gain en puissance dantenne maximal autoris pour les priphriques dans les bandes5250 5350MHz et 5470 5725MHz doit respecter la limite e.i.r.p. Mise en garde: Le gain en puissance dantenne maximal autoris pour les priphriques dans les bandes5725 5825MHz doit respecter les limites e.i.r.p. spcifies pour les oprations point point et non point point le cas chant. Mise en garde: Sachez que les radars de haute puissance sont dsigns comme utilisateurs principaux (c.--d. utilisateurs prioritaires) des bandes5250 5350MHz et 5650 5850MHz, et que ces radars peuvent causer des interfrences ou endommager les priphriques LE-LAN. by Honeywell 16201 25th Avenue West Lynnwood, Washington 98087 U.S.A. tel 425.921.4290 www.honeywellaidc.com Copyright 2015 Intermec, Inc. Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. CK70 Mobile Computer Compliance Insert

*933-206-004*

P/N 933-206-004, Revision D

 

 

The CK70 ships with a partially charged battery. You will need a DX1, DX2, or DX4 multidock and a power supply to charge the battery. Das Modell CK70 wird mit einem teilweise geladenen Akkusatz ausgeliefert. Es wird ein DX1, DX2 oder DX4 Multidock und ein Netzteil zum Laden des Akkus bentigt. El modelo CK70 se enva con una batera parcialmente cargada. Necesitar un multi-

acoplador DX1, DX2 DX4 y una fuente de alimentacin para cargarla. Le CK70 est fourni avec une pile partiellement charge. Vous aurez besoin dun multi-

socle DX1, DX2 ou DX4 et dun bloc dalimentation pour charger la pile. CK70 dikirim bersama baterai yang setengah terisi. Anda akan memerlukan dok majemuk DX1, DX2, atau DX4 dan catu daya untuk mengisi baterai. CK70 DX1DX2 DX4 CK70 . DX1, DX2, DX4 - . O CK70 fornecido com uma bateria parcialmente carregada. Para carreg-la, sero necessrias mltiplas bases DX1, DX2 ou DX4 e uma fonte de alimentao. CK70 .

, DX1, DX2 DX4

. DX4 CK70 ksmen arj edilmi bir pil ile gelir. Pili arj etmek iin bir DX1, DX2 veya DX4 oklu yuvaya ve bir g kaynana ihtiyacnz olacak. Multi-Dock CK70 DX1, DX2 CK70 DX1DX2 DX4 CK70 DX1DX2 DX4 CK70 Mobile Computer 1001CP01C-H1, 1001CP01F8, 1001CP01F9, 1001CP01S, 1001CP01U, 1001CP01U-H1 Where to Find More Information Verweise zu weiteren Informationen Dnde encontrar ms informacin O trouver dautres dtails Tempat Mencari Informasi Lebih Lanjut www.honeywellaidc.com www.hsmcontactsupport.com Onde obter mais informaes Daha Fazla Bilgi Nerede Bulunabilir Caution: See Compliance Insert for use restrictions associated with this product. Vorsicht: Das Konformittsblatt fhrt etwaige Verwendungseinschrnkungen fr dieses Produkt an. Precaucin: Consulte el Inserto de cumplimiento para ver las restricciones de uso asociadas con este producto. Mise en garde : Consultez la Dclaration de conformit pour les restrictions dusage associes ce produit. Hati-hati: Bacalah Sisipan Kepatuhan tentang pembatasan pemakaian yang.

:

. Cuidado: Consulte as informaes sobre as restries de uso associadas a este produto no encarte sobre conformidade.

: . ,

,

. Dikkat: Bu rnle ilgili kullanm kstlamalar iin Uyumluluk Ek Sayfasna bakn. , :

Warranty. Garantie. Garanta. Garantie. Garansi. Garantia. Garanti. www.honeywellaidc.com/warranty_information Patents. Patente. Patentes. Brevets. Paten. Patentes. Patentler. www.hsmpats.com CK70 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide

*930-236-006*

P/N 930-236-006 by Honeywell 16201 25th Avenue West Lynnwood, Washington 98087 U.S.A. tel 425.921.4290 www.honeywellaidc.com Copyright 2015 Intermec, Inc. Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Quick Start Guide Mobilcomputer-Kurzanleitung Gua de comienzo rpido para la computadora mvil Guide de dmarrage rapide de lordinateur mobile Panduan Memulai Cepat Komputer Layap Manual de Consulta Rpida do Computador Mvel Hzl Balama Klavuzu CK70 10 9 8 12 11 1 7 5 6 2 4 3 SIM microSD 39.5 2.3 N*cm

(3.5 0.2 lbf*in)

 

 

CN70, CN70e Mobile Computer Compliance Insert Models 1000CP01C-H1, 1000CP02C-H1 For Users in English-Speaking Regions (en) Caution: This marking indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use. Retain this supplement for future reference. Users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. Battery and Power Supply Information Caution: For use with Intermec battery pack Model 1000AB02 only. See battery instructions. For power supply, use Intermec Model 9001AE02 or Model 9002AX02. No user-serviceable parts. Charge only in Intermec Models 1000CP01C or 1000CP02C or with base 1002UU01, 1002UU02, 1002UU03, 1002UU04, or 1002UU05 using 1002UC01 or 1002UD01 adapters. Use of incorrect charger may present a risk of fire or explosion. Promptly dispose of used battery pack according to the instructions. 802.11 Radio Precaution Statement Caution: Users are responsible for configuring the channels of operation that comply with their country regulatory standards. A Wireless Network Administrator should review the operating restrictions detailed within the Access Point installation manual. Radiation Exposure Statement Warning: This equipment complies with International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), IEEE C95.1, Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) Bulletin 65, Canada RSS-102, and European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC) limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) radiation. If a body worn accessory is not purchased from Intermec, the accessory must contain no metal and provide 1.50 cm (0.59 in) space between the device and the body. Use of antennas and accessories not authorized may void the compliance of this product and may result in RF exposure beyond the limits established for this equipment. To find RF exposure information, go to www.intermec.com > Products > Computers > Handheld Computers > CN70 or CN70e >

Manuals tab, and then scroll down to Regulatory Information. For Users in the U.S.A. and Canada Scan Engine and Camera Flash Compliance and Precautions This product is registered with the CDRH as a Class II laser Product (21 CFR Subchapter J, Part 1040). This product has a maximum output of 1 mW at 630-680 nm. Caution: Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein, may result in hazardous laser light exposure. Note: There are no controls or adjustments provided for routine operation or maintenance of the product. There are no user-serviceable parts inside this product. This product complies with IEC 62471 for LED safety. This product may use any of the following scan engines:

EA30 To find Laser and Imager classification information for scan engines used in Intermec products, go to www.intermec.com > Products >

Computers > Handheld Computers > CN70 or CN70e > Manuals tab, and then scroll down to Regulatory Information. The camera assembly with flash is classified as: Risk Group 2. Caution: When using the camera flash, keep the camera flash LED at least 317 mm (12.5 in) away from the subjects eyes. Otherwise serious damage to ones eyes may occur. U.S.A. Digital Emissions Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Canadian Compliance This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standards. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3 (B) 802.11a Radio Precaution Statement Caution: 802.11a wireless LAN 5150 to 5250 MHz (5.15 to 5.25 GHz) (5 GHz radio channels 34 to 48) is restricted to indoor operations to reduce harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite System (MSS) operations. Caution: The maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the bands 5250 to5350 MHz and 5470 to 5725 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limit. Caution: The maximum antenna gain permitted for devices in the band 5725 to 5825 MHz shall comply with the e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point and non point-to-point operation as appropriate. Caution: Be advised that high-power radars are allocated as primary users (i.e. priority users) of the bands 5250 to 5350 MHz and 5650 to 5850 MHz and that these radars could cause interference and/or damage to LE-LAN devices. Pour les utilisateurs canadiens (fr) Mise en garde : Cette marque indique que lutilisateur doit lire toute la documentation incluse avant lutilisation. Conservez ce supplment pour rfrence future. Les utilisateurs de ce produit sont mis en garde contre lutilisation daccessoires et de priphriques qui ne sont pas approuvs par Intermec Technologies Corporation. Lutilisation daccessoires autres que ceux recommands, ou des modifications ce produit qui ne sont pas approuves par Intermec Technologies Corporation, peuvent annuler la conformit de ce produit et avoir comme rsultat la perte de lautorit de lutilisateur faire fonctionner lquipement. Information sur les piles et le bloc dalimentation Mise en garde : Pour utilisation avec le bloc-piles Intermec 1000AB02 exclusivement. Voir les instructions pour les piles. Pour le bloc dalimentation CA, utiliser le modle Intermec 9001AE02 ou le modle 9002AX02. Aucune pice rparable par lutilisateur. Pour charger, utiliser uniquement le modles Intermec 1000CP01C ou 1000CPU02C ou les bases 1002UU01, 1002UU02, 1002UU03, 1002UU04 ou 1002UU05 avec les adaptateurs 1002UC01 ou 1002UD01. Lutilisation dun chargeur inappropri prsente un risque dincendie ou dexplosion. Mettre rapidement au rebut le bloc-piles usag, conformment aux instructions. 802.11 nonc de mise en garde radio Mise en garde : Il incombe aux utilisateurs de configurer les canaux de fonctionnement de manire ce quils se conforment aux normes rglementaires de leur pays. Ladministrateur dun rseau sans fil doit revoir les restrictions de fonctionnement indiques en dtail au manuel dinstallation du point daccs. nonc sur lexposition aux radiations Avertissement : Cet quipement est conforme la Commission internationale de protection contre les rayonnements non ionisants

(ICNIRP), la norme IEEE C95.1, au bulletin 65 de lOET (Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology), la norme Canada RSS-102 et aux limites Comit Europen de Normalisation lectrotechnique (CENELEC) dexposition des rayonnements radiolectriques. Si un accessoire de corps nest pas achet auprs dIntermec, cet accessoire ne doit contenir aucun mtal et garantir un espace de 1.50 cm entre lappareil et le corps. Lutilisation dantennes et daccessoires non autoriss peut annuler la conformit de cet appareil et peut causer une exposition aux RF au-del des limites tablies pour cet quipement. Pour obtenir de linformation sur lexposition aux RF, aller www.intermec.com > Products > Computers > Handheld Computers > CN70 ou CN70e > Manuals et descendre dans la liste jusqu Regulatory Information. Conformit et prcautions prendre avec le flash de la camra et limageur Ce produit est enregistr auprs du CDRH titre de produit LASER de Classe II (21 CFR sous-chapitre J, partie 1040). Ce produit a une puissance de sortie de 1 mW 630-680 nm. Mise en garde: Lutilisation de commandes, de rglages ou dinstructions autres que ceux spcifis prsente un risque dexposition dangereuse la lumire laser. Remarque: Aucune commande ni aucun rglage ne sont fournis pour les oprations ou lentretien de routine du produit. Ce produit ne contient aucune pice rparable par lutilisateur. Ce produit est conforme la norme IEC 62471 concernant la scurit des LED. Ce produit peut utiliser nimporte lequel des modules de lecture pour imageur/lecteur laser Intermec suivants :

EA30 Pour retrouver des informations sur la classification des modules de lecture Intermec pour lecteurs laser et imageurs, accder longlet www.intermec.com > Products > Computers > Handheld Computers > CN70 ou CN70e > Manuals et descendre dans la liste jusqu Regulatory Information. Le bloc camra et son flash sont classs comme tant de: Catgorie de risque2. Mise en garde : Lors de l'utilisation du flash de la camra, ne pas approcher la LED du flash de la camra moins de 317 mm des yeux du sujet. Le non-respect de cette consigne pourrait entraner des lsions oculaires chez ce dernier. Conformit aux normes canadiennes sur les appareils numriques Ce priphrique est conforme aux normes RSS exemptes de licence d'Industrie Canada. Lutilisation est assujettie aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) Ce dispositif ne doit pas causer dinterfrence dommageable et (2) Ce dispositif doit tolrer toute interfrence, incluant linterfrence pouvant causer un fonctionnement indsirable. CAN ICES-3 (B)/NMB-3 (B) 802.11a nonc de mise en garde radio Mise en garde: 802.11a sans fil LAN 5150 5250MHz (5,15 5,25GHz) (frquences radio34 48 de 5GHz) est limit aux oprations en intrieur pour rduire les interfrences nuisibles aux oprations du systme mobile par satellite (MSS) dans le mme canal. Mise en garde: Le gain en puissance dantenne maximal autoris pour les priphriques dans les bandes5250 5350MHz et 5470 5725MHz doit respecter la limite e.i.r.p. Mise en garde: Le gain en puissance dantenne maximal autoris pour les priphriques dans les bandes5725 5825MHz doit respecter les limites e.i.r.p. spcifies pour les oprations point point et non point point le cas chant. Mise en garde: Sachez que les radars de haute puissance sont dsigns comme utilisateurs principaux (c.--d. utilisateurs prioritaires) des bandes5250 5350MHz et 5650 5850MHz, et que ces radars peuvent causer des interfrences ou endommager les priphriques LE-LAN. by Honeywell 16201 25th Avenue West Lynnwood, Washington 98087 U.S.A. tel 425.921.4290 www.honeywellaidc.com Copyright 2015 Intermec, Inc. Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. CN70, CN70e Mobile Computer Compliance Insert

*933-205-004*

P/N 933-205-004, Revision D

 

 

The CN70 ships with a partially charged battery. You will need a DX1, DX2, or DX4 multidock and a power supply to charge the battery. Das Modell CN70 wird mit einem teilweise geladenen Akkusatz ausgeliefert. Es wird ein DX1, DX2 oder DX4 Multidock und ein Netzteil zum Laden des Akkus bentigt. El modelo CN70 se enva con una batera parcialmente cargada. Necesitar un multi-

acoplador DX1, DX2 DX4 y una fuente de alimentacin para cargarla. Le CN70 est fourni avec une pile partiellement charge. Vous aurez besoin dun multi-

socle DX1, DX2 ou DX4 et dun bloc dalimentation pour charger la pile. CN70 dikirim bersama baterai yang setengah terisi. Anda akan memerlukan dok majemuk DX1, DX2, atau DX4 dan catu daya untuk mengisi baterai. CN70 DX1DX2 DX4 CN70 . DX1, DX2, DX4 - . O CN70 fornecido com uma bateria parcialmente carregada. Para carreg-la, sero necessrias mltiplas bases DX1, DX2 ou DX e uma fonte de alimentao. CN70 .

, DX1, DX2 DX4

. DX4 CN70 ksmen arj edilmi bir pil ile gelir. Pili arj etmek iin bir DX1, DX2 veya DX3 oklu yuvaya ve bir g kaynana ihtiyacnz olacak. Multi-Dock CN70 DX1, DX2 CN70 DX1DX2 DX4 CN70 DX1DX2 DX4 CN70 Mobile Computer 1000CP01, 1000CP01C-H1, 1000CP01F8, 1000CP01F9, 1000CP01S, 1000CP01U, 1000CP01U-H1 Where to Find More Information Verweise zu weiteren Informationen Dnde encontrar ms informacin O trouver dautres dtails Tempat Mencari Informasi Lebih Lanjut www.honeywellaidc.com www.hsmcontactsupport.com Onde obter mais informaes Daha Fazla Bilgi Nerede Bulunabilir Caution: See Compliance Insert for use restrictions associated with this product. Vorsicht: Das Konformittsblatt fhrt etwaige Verwendungseinschrnkungen fr dieses Produkt an. Precaucin: Consulte el Inserto de cumplimiento para ver las restricciones de uso asociadas con este producto. Mise en garde: Consultez la Dclaration de conformit pour les restrictions dusage associes ce produit. Hati-hati: Bacalah Sisipan Kepatuhan tentang pembatasan pemakaian yang.

:

. Cuidado: Consulte as informaes sobre as restries de uso associadas a este produto no encarte sobre conformidade.

: . ,

,

. Dikkat: Bu rnle ilgili kullanm kstlamalar iin Uyumluluk Ek Sayfasna bakn. , :

Warranty. Garantie. Garanta. Garantie. Garansi. Garantia. Garanti. www.honeywellaidc.com/warranty_information Patents. Patente. Patentes. Brevets. Paten. Patentes. Patentler. www.hsmpats.com CN70 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide

*930-234-005*

P/N 930-234-005 by Honeywell 16201 25th Avenue West Lynnwood, Washington 98087 U.S.A. tel 425.921.4290 www.honeywellaidc.com Copyright 2015 Intermec, Inc. Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Quick Start Guide Mobilcomputer-Kurzanleitung Gua de comienzo rpido para la computadora mvil Guide de dmarrage de lordinateur mobile Panduan Memulai Cepat Komputer Layap Manual de Consulta Rpida do Computador Mvel Hzl Balama Klavuzu CN70 10 9 8 12 11 1 7 5 6 2 4 3 SIM (WAN) microSD

 

 

The CN70e ships with a partially charged battery. You will need a DX1, DX2, or DX4 multidock and a power supply to charge the battery. Das Modell CN70e wird mit einem teilweise geladenen Akkusatz ausgeliefert. Es wird ein DX1, DX2 oder DX4 Multidock und ein Netzteil zum Laden des Akkus bentigt. El modelo CN70e se enva con una batera parcialmente cargada. Necesitar un multi-

acoplador DX1, DX2 DX4 y una fuente de alimentacin para cargarla. Le CN70e est fourni avec une pile partiellement charge. Vous aurez besoin dun multi-

socle DX1, DX2 ou DX4 et dun bloc dalimentation pour charger la pile. CN70e dikirim bersama baterai yang setengah terisi. Anda akan memerlukan dok majemuk DX1, DX2, atau DX4 dan catu daya untuk mengisi baterai. CN70e DX1DX2 DX4 CN70e . DX1, DX2, DX4 - . O CN70e fornecido com uma bateria parcialmente carregada. Para carreg-la, sero necessrias mltiplas bases DX1, DX2 ou DX4 e uma fonte de alimentao. CN70e .

, DX1, DX2 DX4 . DX4 CN70e ksmen arj edilmi bir pil ile gelir. Pili arj etmek iin bir DX1, DX2 veya DX4 oklu yuvaya ve bir g kaynana ihtiyacnz olacak. Multi-Dock CN70e DX1, DX2 CN70e DX1DX2 DX4 CN70e DX1DX2 DX4 CN70e Mobile Computer 1000CP02, 1000CP02C-H1, 1000CP02F8, 1000CP02F9, 1000CP02S, 1000CP02U, 1000CP02U-H1 Where to Find More Information Verweise zu weiteren Informationen Dnde encontrar ms informacin O trouver dautres dtails Tempat Mencari Informasi Lebih Lanjut www.honeywellaidc.com www.hsmcontactsupport.com Onde obter mais informaes Daha Fazla Bilgi Nerede Bulunabilir Caution: See Compliance Insert for use restrictions associated with this product. Vorsicht: Das Konformittsblatt fhrt etwaige Verwendungseinschrnkungen fr dieses Produkt an. Precaucin: Consulte el Inserto de cumplimiento para ver las restricciones de uso asociadas con este producto. Mise en garde : Consultez la Dclaration de conformit pour les restrictions dusage associes ce produit. Hati-hati: Bacalah Sisipan Kepatuhan tentang pembatasan pemakaian yang.

:

. Cuidado: Consulte as informaes sobre as restries de uso associadas a este produto no encarte sobre conformidade.

: . ,

,

. Dikkat: Bu rnle ilgili kullanm kstlamalar iin Uyumluluk Ek Sayfasna bakn. , :

Warranty. Garantie. Garanta. Garantie. Garansi. Garantia. Garanti. www.honeywellaidc.com/warranty_information Patents. Patente. Patentes. Brevets. Paten. Patentes. Patentler. www.hsmpats.com CN70e Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide

*930-235-005*

P/N 930-235-005 by Honeywell 16201 25th Avenue West Lynnwood, Washington 98087 U.S.A. tel 425.921.4290 www.honeywellaidc.com Copyright 2015 Intermec, Inc. Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved. Quick Start Guide Mobilcomputer-Kurzanleitung Gua de comienzo rpido para la computadora mvil Manual de Consulta Rpida do Computador Mvel Panduan Memulai Cepat Komputer Layap Manual de Consulta Rpida do Computador Mvel Hzl Balama Klavuzu CN70e 10 9 8 12 11 1 7 5 6 2 4 3 SIM (WAN) microSD

 

 

CN70 Mobile Computer Compliance Insert Model 1000CP03C Caution: This marking indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use. Retain this supplement for future reference. The users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. Battery and Power Supply Information Caution: For use with Intermec battery pack Model 1000AB01 or 1000AB02 only. See battery instructions. For power supply, use Intermec Model 9001AE02 or Model 9002AX02. No user-serviceable parts. Charge only in Intermec Model 1000CP03C or with base 1002UU01, 1002UU02, 1002UU03, 1002UU04, or 1002UU05 using 1002UC01 or 1002UD01 adapters. Use of incorrect charger may present a risk of fire or explosion. Laser Compliance and Precaution The 1000CP03C is registered with the CDRH as a Class II LASER Product (21 CFR Subchapter J, Part 1040). This product has a maximum output of 1 mW at 630-670 nm. Caution: There are no user serviceable parts inside the 1000CP03C. Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein, may result in hazardous laser light exposure of up to 1 mW at 630-670 nm. Note: There are no controls or adjustments provided for routine operation or maintenance of the 1000CP03C. FCC Digital Emissions Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Canadian Digital Apparatus Compliance This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. 802.11 Radio Precaution Statement Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. Caution: Users are responsible for configuring the channels of operation that comply with their country regulatory standards. A Wireless Network Administrator should review the operating restrictions detailed within the Access Point installation manual. Caution: 802.11a wireless LAN 5.15 to 5.25 GHz (5 GHz radio channels 34 to 48) is restricted to indoor operations to reduce harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite System (MSS) operations. Radiation Exposure Statement Radio Frequency (RF) Radiation Exposure - Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information Warning: This equipment complies with International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), IEEE C95.1, and Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) Bulletin 65 limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) radiation. Use of antennas and accessories not authorized may void the compliance of this product and may result in RF exposure beyond the limits established for this equipment. The only approved body-worn accessory is the SWA developed wrist holster providing 12 mm of separation from the left side of the computer. Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure - Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Test Results for Model 1000CP03C:

Radio Technology CDMA 802.11abgn Bluetooth W/kg 0.517 1.190 0.239 0.398 N/A Comment At the ear For body-worn operation At the ear For body-worn operation Negligible due to very low output power Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2011 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. CN70 Mobile Computer Compliance Insert

*933-274-001*

P/N 933-274-001, Revision A

 

 

CN70, CN70e Mobile Computer Compliance Insert Models 1000CP01C, 1000CP02C Caution: This marking indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use. Retain this supplement for future reference. The users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. Battery and Power Supply Information Caution: For use with Intermec battery pack Model 1000AB01 or 1000AB02 (P/N 318-043-001) only. See battery instructions. For power supply, use Intermec Model 9001AE02 (P/N 851-094-xx2) or Model 9002AX02 (P/N 852-071-xx2). No user-serviceable parts. Charge only in Intermec Models 1000CP01C or 1000CP02C or with base 1002UU01, 1002UU02, 1002UU03, 1002UU04, or 1002UU05 using 1002UC01 or 1002UD01 adapters. Use of incorrect charger may present a risk of fire or explosion. Laser Compliance and Precaution The 1000CP01C and 1000CP02C are registered with the CDRH as a Class II LASER Product (21 CFR Subchapter J, Part 1040). This product has a maximum output of 1 mW at 630-670 nm. Caution: There are no user serviceable parts inside the 1000CP01C or 1000CP02C. Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein, may result in hazardous laser light exposure of up to 1 mW at 630-670 nm. Note: There are no controls or adjustments provided for routine operation or maintenance of the 1000CP01C or 1000CP02C. FCC Digital Emissions Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Canadian Digital Apparatus Compliance This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. 802.11 Radio Precaution Statement Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. Caution: Users are responsible for configuring the channels of operation that comply with their country regulatory standards. A Wireless Network Administrator should review the operating restrictions detailed within the Access Point installation manual. Caution: 802.11a wireless LAN 5.15 to 5.25 GHz (5 GHz radio channels 34 to 48) is restricted to indoor operations to reduce harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite System (MSS) operations. Radiation Exposure Statement Radio Wave Exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information Warning: This equipment complies with International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), IEEE C95.1, Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) Bulletin 65, Canada RSS-102, and CENELEC limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) radiation. Use of antennas and accessories not authorized may void the compliance of this product and may result in RF exposures beyond the limits established for this equipment. To find RF exposure information, go to www.intermec.com > Products > Computers > Handheld Computers > CN70 or CN70e > Manuals tab and then scroll down to Regulatory Information. Attention: Cette marque indique que lutilisateur doit lire toute la documentation incluse avant lutilisation. Conservez ce supplment pour rfrence future. Les utilisateurs de ce produit sont mis en garde contre lutilisation daccessoires et de priphriques qui ne sont pas approuvs par Intermec Technologies Corporation. Lutilisation daccessoires autres que ceux recommands, ou des modifications ce produit qui ne sont pas approuves par Intermec Technologies Corporation, peuvent annuler la conformit de ce produit et avoir comme rsultat la perte de lautorit de lutilisateur faire fonctionner lquipement. Information sur les piles et le bloc dalimentation Attention: Pour utilisation avec le bloc-piles Intermec 1000AB01 ou 1000AB02 (n/p 318-043-001) exclusivement. Voir les instructions pour les piles. Pour le bloc d'alimentation CA, utiliser le modle Intermec 9001AE02 (n/p 851-094-xx2) ou le modle 9002AX02 (n/p 852-071-xx2). Aucune pice rparable par lutilisateur. Pour charger, utiliser uniquement le modles Intermec 1000CP01C, 1000CP02C ou les bases 1002UU01, 1002UU02, 1002UU03, 1002UU04 ou 1002UU05 avec les adaptateurs 1002UC01 ou 1002UD01. Lutilisation dun chargeur inappropri prsente un risque dincendie ou d'explosion. Conformit et prcautions pour lutilisation du laser Le 1000CP01C et le 1000CP02C est enregistr auprs du CDRH titre de produit au laser de Classe II (21 CFR sous-chapitre J, partie 1040). La sortie maximale de ce produit est de 1 mW 630-670 nm. Attention: Le 1000CP01C et le 1000CP02C ne contiennent aucune pice rparable par lutilisateur. Lutilisation de commandes ou de rglages, ou lexcution de procdures autres que ce qui est spcifi aux prsentes, peut prsenter une exposition dangereuse la lumire laser d'une intensit allant jusqu' 1 mW 630-670 nm. Remarque: Il ny a pas de contrles ou dajustements fournis pour le fonctionnement ou lentretien priodique du 1000CP01C et du 1000CP02C. Conformit aux normes canadiennes sur les appareils numriques Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. 802.11 nonc de mise en garde radio Attention: Il incombe aux utilisateurs de configurer les canaux de fonctionnement de manire ce quils se conforment aux normes rglementaires de leur pays. Ladministrateur dun rseau sans fil doit revoir les restrictions de fonctionnement indiques en dtail au manuel dinstallation du point daccs. Attention: 802.11a Lutilisation du LAN sans fil 5,15 5,25 GHz (canaux radio de 5 GHz de 34 48) est restreinte lintrieur afin de rduire linterfrence dommageable au fonctionnement des systmes mobiles par satellite (SMS) partageant les mmes canaux. nonc sur l'exposition aux radiations Information sur lexposition aux ondes radiolectriques et sur le dbit dabsorption spcifique (DAS) Avertissement: Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition au rayonnement frquence radiolectrique (RF) tablies par la Commission internationale de protection contre les rayonnements non ionisants (ICNIRP), le Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET), bulletin 65, la norme CNR-102 dIndustrie Canada et le rglement CENELEC. Lutilisation dantennes et daccessoires non autoriss peut annuler la conformit de cet appareil et peut causer une exposition aux RF au-del des limites tablies pour cet quipement. Pour obtenir de linformation sur lexposition aux RF, aller www.intermec.com > Products >

Computers > Handheld Computers > CN70 ou CN70e > onglet Manuals, puis faire dfiler le curseur de la page jusqu Regulatory Information. Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2011 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. CN70, CN70e Mobile Computer Compliance Insert

*933-205-001*

P/N 933-205-001, Revision A

 

 

CK70 Mobile Computer Compliance Insert Model 1001CP01C Caution: This marking indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use. Retain this supplement for future reference. The users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. Battery and Power Supply Information Caution: For use with Intermec battery pack Model 1001AB01 or 1001AB02 (P/N 318-046-001) only. See battery instructions. For power supply, use Intermec Model 9001AE02 (P/N 851-094-xx2) or Model 9002AX02 (P/N 852-071-xx2). No user-serviceable parts. Charge only in Intermec Models 1001CP01C or with base 1002UU01, 1002UU02, 1002UU03, 1002UU04, or 1002UU05 using 1002UC02 or 1002UD02 adapters. Use of incorrect charger may present a risk of fire or explosion. Laser Compliance and Precaution The 1001CP01C is registered with the CDRH as a Class II LASER Product (21 CFR Subchapter J, Part 1040). This product has a maximum output of 1 mW at 630-670 nm. Caution: There are no user serviceable parts inside the 1001CP01C. Use of controls or adjustments, or performance of procedures other than those specified herein, may result in hazardous laser light exposure of up to 1 mW at 630-670 nm. Note: There are no controls or adjustments provided for routine operation or maintenance of the 1001CP01C. FCC Digital Emissions Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Canadian Digital Apparatus Compliance This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. 802.11 Radio Precaution Statement Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. Caution: Users are responsible for configuring the channels of operation that comply with their country regulatory standards. A Wireless Network Administrator should review the operating restrictions detailed within the Access Point installation manual. Caution: 802.11a wireless LAN 5.15 to 5.25 GHz (5 GHz radio channels 34 to 48) is restricted to indoor operations to reduce harmful interference to co-channel Mobile Satellite System (MSS) operations. Radiation Exposure Statement Radio Wave Exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information Warning: This equipment complies with International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), IEEE C95.1, Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET) Bulletin 65, Canada RSS-102, and CENELEC limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) radiation. Use of antennas and accessories not authorized may void the compliance of this product and may result in RF exposures beyond the limits established for this equipment. To find RF exposure information, go to www.intermec.com > Products > Computers > Handheld Computers > CK70 > Manuals tab and then scroll down to Regulatory Information. Attention: Cette marque indique que lutilisateur doit lire toute la documentation incluse avant lutilisation. Conservez ce supplment pour rfrence future. Les utilisateurs de ce produit sont mis en garde contre lutilisation daccessoires et de priphriques qui ne sont pas approuvs par Intermec Technologies Corporation. Lutilisation daccessoires autres que ceux recommands, ou des modifications ce produit qui ne sont pas approuves par Intermec Technologies Corporation, peuvent annuler la conformit de ce produit et avoir comme rsultat la perte de lautorit de lutilisateur faire fonctionner lquipement. Information sur les piles et le bloc dalimentation Attention: Pour utilisation avec le bloc-piles Intermec 1001AB01 ou 1001AB02 (n/p 318-046-001) exclusivement. Voir les instructions pour les piles. Pour le bloc d'alimentation CA, utiliser le modle Intermec 9001AE02 (n/p 851-094-xx2) ou le modle 9002AX02 (n/p 852-071-xx2). Aucune pice rparable par lutilisateur. Pour charger, utiliser uniquement le modles Intermec 1001CP01C ou les bases 1002UU01, 1002UU02, 1002UU03, 1002UU04 ou 1002UU05 avec les adaptateurs 1002UC02 ou 1002UD02. Lutilisation dun chargeur inappropri prsente un risque dincendie ou d'explosion. Conformit et prcautions pour lutilisation du laser Le 1001CP01C est enregistr auprs du CDRH titre de produit au laser de Classe II (21 CFR sous-chapitre J, partie 1040). La sortie maximale de ce produit est de 1 mW 630-670 nm. Attention: Le 1001CP01C ne contiennent aucune pice rparable par lutilisateur. Lutilisation de commandes ou de rglages, ou lexcution de procdures autres que ce qui est spcifi aux prsentes, peut prsenter une exposition dangereuse la lumire laser d'une intensit allant jusqu' 1 mW 630-670 nm. Remarque: Il ny a pas de contrles ou dajustements fournis pour le fonctionnement ou lentretien priodique du 1001CP01C. Conformit aux normes canadiennes sur les appareils numriques Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. 802.11 nonc de mise en garde radio Attention: Il incombe aux utilisateurs de configurer les canaux de fonctionnement de manire ce quils se conforment aux normes rglementaires de leur pays. Ladministrateur dun rseau sans fil doit revoir les restrictions de fonctionnement indiques en dtail au manuel dinstallation du point daccs. Attention: 802.11a Lutilisation du LAN sans fil 5,15 5,25 GHz (canaux radio de 5 GHz de 34 48) est restreinte lintrieur afin de rduire linterfrence dommageable au fonctionnement des systmes mobiles par satellite (SMS) partageant les mmes canaux. nonc sur l'exposition aux radiations Information sur lexposition aux ondes radiolectriques et sur le dbit dabsorption spcifique (DAS) Avertissement: Cet quipement est conforme aux limites dexposition au rayonnement frquence radiolectrique (RF) tablies par la Commission internationale de protection contre les rayonnements non ionisants (ICNIRP), le Federal Communications Commission Office of Engineering and Technology (OET), bulletin 65, la norme CNR-102 dIndustrie Canada et le rglement CENELEC. Lutilisation dantennes et daccessoires non autoriss peut annuler la conformit de cet appareil et peut causer une exposition aux RF au-del des limites tablies pour cet quipement. Pour obtenir de linformation sur lexposition aux RF, aller www.intermec.com > Products >

Computers > Handheld Computers > CK70 > onglet Manuals, puis faire dfiler le curseur de la page jusqu Regulatory Information. Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2011 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. CK70 Mobile Computer Compliance Insert

*933-206-001*

P/N 933-206-001, Revision A

 

 

Honeywell International Inc Honeywell Scanning and Mobility 9680 Old Bailes Road Fort Mill, SC 29707 USA Date: 26-February-2015 Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) Device Listings The standard for compatibility of digital wireless devices with hearing aids is set forth in American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standard C63.19. ANSI C63.19 contains two sets of standards: an "M" rating from M1 to M4 for reduced radio frequency (RF) interference to enable acoustic coupling with hearing aids that do not operate in t-coil mode, and a

"T" rating from T1 to T4 to enable inductive coupling with hearing aids operating in t-coil mode. A digital wireless handset is considered hearing aid-compatible for acoustic coupling if it meets at least an "M3" rating under the ANSI standard. A digital wireless handset is considered hearing aid compatible for inductive coupling if it meets at least a "T3" rating under the ANSI standard. M-Ratings: Devices rated M3 or M4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to generate less interference with hearing devices than devices that are not labeled. M4 is the superior/higher of the two ratings. T-Ratings: Devices rated T3 or T4 meet FCC requirements and are likely to be more usable with a hearing devices t-coil than unrated devices. T4 is the superior/higher of the two ratings. These ratings are not guaranteed. Results will vary depending on the level of immunity of your hearing device and the degree of your hearing loss. If your hearing device happens to be vulnerable to interference, you may not be able to use a rated device successfully. Trying out the device with your hearing device is the best way to evaluate it for your personal needs. When some wireless devices are used near some hearing devices such as hearing aids and implants, users may detect a buzzing or humming noise. Some hearing devices are more immune than others to this interference noise. Wireless devices may also vary in the amount of interference they generate. The more immune the hearing aid device is, the less likely one is to experience interference noise from the wireless device. Hearing aid devices may also be rated. Adding the ratings of the hearing aid and the device can predict the usability of the two devices together:

Any combined rating equal to or greater than six offers the best use. Any combined rating equal to five is considered normal use. Note for models tested under 2007 C63.19 Version: These models have been tested and rated for use with hearing aids for some of the wireless technologies that they use. However, there may be some newer wireless technologies used in these devices that have not been tested yet for use with hearing aids. It is important to try the different features of these devices thoroughly and in different locations, using your hearing aid or cochlear implant, to determine if you hear any interfering noise. Consult your service provider or the manufacturer of the device for information on hearing aid compatibility. If you have questions about return or exchange policies, consult your service provider or device retailer. The following devices are currently offered:

HSM Model Name 6000LU 60SLU 70ELG0 70ELGN 7800LW 9700LUP 99EXLW CN50 CS40 / Model 1005CP01 CK70 CDMA / Model 1001CP01C-H1 M4 / T4 CK70 UMTS / Model 1001CP01U-H1 M4 / T3 CN51 / Model 1015CP01S CN70 CDMA / Model 1000CP01C-H1 M4 / T4 CN70 UMTS / Model 1000CP01U-H1 M4 / T3 CN70e CDMA / Model 1000CP02C-H1 M4 / T4 CN70e UMTS / Model 1000CP02U-H1 M4 / T3 HAC Rating Air - Interface M3 / T3 M3 / T3 M4 / T4 M4 / T4 M3 / T3 M3 / T3 M3 / T3 M4 M3 GSM/WCDMA GSM/WCDMA GSM/CDMA/WCDMA GSM/CDMA/WCDMA GSM/WCDMA GSM/WCDMA GSM/WCDMA GSM/CDMA/WCDMA GSM/WCDMA CDMA GSM/WCDMA GSM/CDMA/WCDMA CDMA GSM/WCDMA CDMA GSM/WCDMA M3 C63.19 Version 2007 2007 2011 2011 2007 2007 2007 2007 2007 2011 2011 2011 2011 2011 2011 2011

 

 

The CN70 ships with a partially charged battery. You will need a DX1, DX2, or DX4 multi-dock and a power supply to charge the battery. CN70 DX1DX2 DX4 CN70 DX1DX2 DX4 Le CN70 est fourni avec une pile partiellement charge. Vous aurez besoin dun multi-

socle DX1, DX2 ou DX4 et dun bloc dalimentation pour charger la pile. Das Modell CN70 wird mit einem teilweise geladenen Akkusatz ausgeliefert. Es wird ein DX1, DX2 oder DX4 Multidock und ein Netzteil zum Laden des Akkus bentigt.

- CK70 . , DX1, DX2 DX4 . CN70 dikirim bersama baterai yang setengah terisi. Anda akan memerlukan dok majemuk DX1, DX2, atau DX4 dan catu daya untuk mengisi baterai. CN70 DX1DX2 DX4 CN70 . DX1, DX2, DX4 - . O CN70 fornecido com uma bateria parcialmente carregada. Para carreg-la, sero necessrias mltiplas bases DX1, DX2 ou DX e uma fonte de alimentao. CN70 .

, DX1, DX2 DX4

. El modelo CN70 se enva con una batera parcialmente cargada. Necesitar un multi-

acoplador DX1, DX2 DX4 y una fuente de alimentacin para cargarla. Multi-Dock DX4 . CN70 DX1, DX2 CN70 Mobile Computer 1000CP01, 1000CP01C, 1000CP01U, 1000CP01W Where to Find More Information O trouver dautres dtails Verweise zu weiteren Informationen Tempat Mencari Informasi Lebih Lanjut www.intermec.com In the U.S.A and Canada, call 1.800.755.5505 Onde obter mais informaes Dnde encontrar ms informacin Caution: See Compliance Insert for use restrictions associated with this product. Attention: Consultez la Dclaration de conformit pour les restrictions dusage associes ce produit. Vorsicht: Das Konformittsblatt fhrt etwaige Verwendungseinschrnkungen fr dieses Produkt an.

: , . Hati-hati: Bacalah Sisipan Kepatuhan tentang pembatasan pemakaian yang terkait dengan produk ini.

. Cuidado: Consulte as informaes sobre as restries de uso associadas a este produto no encarte sobre conformidade.

. Precaucin: Consulte el Inserto de cumplimiento para ver las restricciones de uso asociadas con este producto. This product is protected by one or more patents. Ce produit est protege par un brevet ou plus. Dieses Produkt ist durch ein oder mehrere Patente geschutzt. . Produk ini dilindungi oleh satu atau lebih paten. 1

. Este produto est protegido por uma ou mais patentes. . Este producto esta protegido por una o varias patentes. Electrical rating. Cote lectrique. Stromversorgung. . Peringkat kelistrikan. . Especi caes elctricas. Cali cacn elctrica. : x 4,37 / 4,8 V; 2 / 1,5 A CN70 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide

*930-234-001*

P/N 930-234-001 Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2010 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. Quick Start Guide Guide de dmarrage rapide de lordinateur mobile Mobilcomputer-Kurzanleitung Panduan Memulai Cepat Komputer Layap Manual de Consulta Rpida do Computador Mvel Gua de comienzo rpido para la computadora mvil CN70 10 9 8 12 11 1 7 5 6 2 4 3 SIM microSD To synchronize the CN70 with your Windows PC, visit:

CN70 Windows PC CN70 Windows PC Pour synchroniser le CN70 avec votre PC Windows, allez voir:

Fr Informationen zum Synchronisieren des Modells CN70 mit Ihrem Windows-PC besuchen Sie bitte:

- CN70 Windows PC, :

Untuk menyinkronkan CN70 dengan PC Windows, kunjungi:

CN70 Windows PC CN70 Windows PC ,

Para sincronizar o CN70 com seu PC com sistema operacional Windows, visite:

CN70 , Windows, :

CN70 Window PC Para sincronizar el CN70 con su computadora Windows, visite:

www.windowsmobile.com/getstarted

 

 

The CN70e ships with a partially charged battery. You will need a DX1, DX2, or DX4 multi-dock and a power supply to charge the battery. CN70e DX1DX2 DX4 CN70e DX1DX2 DX4 Le CN70e est fourni avec une pile partiellement charge. Vous aurez besoin dun multi-

socle DX1, DX2 ou DX4 et dun bloc dalimentation pour charger la pile. Das Modell CN70e wird mit einem teilweise geladenen Akkusatz ausgeliefert. Es wird ein DX1, DX2 oder DX4 Multidock und ein Netzteil zum Laden des Akkus bentigt.

- CN70e . , DX1, DX2 DX4 . CN70e dikirim bersama baterai yang setengah terisi. Anda akan memerlukan dok majemuk DX1, DX2, atau DX4 dan catu daya untuk mengisi baterai. CN70e DX1DX2 DX4 CN70e . DX1, DX2, DX4 - . O CN70e fornecido com uma bateria parcialmente carregada. Para carreg-la, sero necessrias mltiplas bases DX1, DX2 ou DX e uma fonte de alimentao. CN70e .

, DX1, DX2 DX4 . El modelo CN70e se enva con una batera parcialmente cargada. Necesitar un multi-

acoplador DX1, DX2 DX4 y una fuente de alimentacin para cargarla. Multi-Dock DX4 CN70e DX1, DX2

. Where to Find More Information O trouver dautres dtails Verweise zu weiteren Informationen Tempat Mencari Informasi Lebih Lanjut www.intermec.com In the U.S.A and Canada, call 1.800.755.5505 Onde obter mais informaes Dnde encontrar ms informacin Caution: See Compliance Insert for use restrictions associated with this product. Attention: Consultez la Dclaration de conformit pour les restrictions dusage associes ce produit. Vorsicht: Das Konformittsblatt fhrt etwaige Verwendungseinschrnkungen fr dieses Produkt an.

: , . Hati-hati: Bacalah Sisipan Kepatuhan tentang pembatasan pemakaian yang terkait dengan produk ini.

. Cuidado: Consulte as informaes sobre as restries de uso associadas a este produto no encarte sobre conformidade.

. Precaucin: Consulte el Inserto de cumplimiento para ver las restricciones de uso asociadas con este producto. This product is protected by one or more patents. Ce produit est protege par un brevet ou plus. Dieses Produkt ist durch ein oder mehrere Patente geschutzt. . Produk ini dilindungi oleh satu atau lebih paten. 1

. Este produto est protegido por uma ou mais patentes. . Este producto esta protegido por una o varias patentes. Electrical rating. Cote lectrique. Stromversorgung. . Peringkat kelistrikan. . Especi caes elctricas. Cali cacn elctrica. : x 4,37 / 4,8 V; 2 / 1,5 A CN70e Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide

*930-235-001*

P/N 930-235-001 Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2010 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. CN70e Mobile Computer 1000CP02, 1000CP02C, 1000CP02U, 1000CP02W Quick Start Guide Guide de dmarrage rapide de lordinateur mobile Mobilcomputer-Kurzanleitung Panduan Memulai Cepat Komputer Layap Manual de Consulta Rpida do Computador Mvel Gua de comienzo rpido para la computadora mvil CN70e 10 9 8 12 11 1 7 5 6 2 4 3 SIM microSD To synchronize the CN70e with your Windows PC, visit:

CN70e Windows PC CN70e Windows PC Pour synchroniser le CN70e avec votre PC Windows, allez voir:

Fr Informationen zum Synchronisieren des Modells CN70e mit Ihrem Windows-PC besuchen Sie bitte:

- CN70e Windows PC, :

Untuk menyinkronkan CN70e dengan PC Windows, kunjungi:

CN70e Windows PC CN70e Windows PC ,

Para sincronizar o CN70e com seu PC com sistema operacional Windows, visite:

CN70e , Windows, :

CN70e Window PC Para sincronizar el CN70e con su computadora Windows, visite:

www.windowsmobile.com/getstarted

 

 

The CK70 ships with a partially charged battery. You will need a DX1, DX2, or DX4 multi-dock and a power supply to charge the battery. CK70 DX1DX2 DX4 CK70 DX1DX2 DX4 Le CK70 est fourni avec une pile partiellement charge. Vous aurez besoin dun multi-

socle DX1, DX2 ou DX4 et dun bloc dalimentation pour charger la pile. Das Modell CK70 wird mit einem teilweise geladenen Akkusatz ausgeliefert. Es wird ein DX1, DX2 oder DX4 Multidock und ein Netzteil zum Laden des Akkus bentigt.

- CK70 . , DX1, DX2 DX4 . CK70 dikirim bersama baterai yang setengah terisi. Anda akan memerlukan dok majemuk DX1, DX2, atau DX4 dan catu daya untuk mengisi baterai. CK70 DX1DX2 DX4 CK70 . DX1, DX2, DX4 - . O CK70 fornecido com uma bateria parcialmente carregada. Para carreg-la, sero necessrias mltiplas bases DX1, DX2 ou DX e uma fonte de alimentao. CK70 .

, DX1, DX2 DX4

. El modelo CK70 se enva con una batera parcialmente cargada. Necesitar un multi-

acoplador DX1, DX2 DX4 y una fuente de alimentacin para cargarla. Multi-Dock DX4 CK70 DX1, DX2

. CK70 Mobile Computer 1001CP01, 1001CP01C, 1001CP01U, 1001CP01W Where to Find More Information O trouver dautres dtails Verweise zu weiteren Informationen Tempat Mencari Informasi Lebih Lanjut www.intermec.com In the U.S.A and Canada, call 1.800.755.5505 Onde obter mais informaes Dnde encontrar ms informacin Caution: See Compliance Insert for use restrictions associated with this product. Attention: Consultez la Dclaration de conformit pour les restrictions dusage associes ce produit. Vorsicht: Das Konformittsblatt fhrt etwaige Verwendungseinschrnkungen fr dieses Produkt an.

: , . Hati-hati: Bacalah Sisipan Kepatuhan tentang pembatasan pemakaian yang terkait dengan produk ini.

. Cuidado: Consulte as informaes sobre as restries de uso associadas a este produto no encarte sobre conformidade.

. Precaucin: Consulte el Inserto de cumplimiento para ver las restricciones de uso asociadas con este producto. This product is protected by one or more patents. Ce produit est protege par un brevet ou plus. Dieses Produkt ist durch ein oder mehrere Patente geschutzt. . Produk ini dilindungi oleh satu atau lebih paten. 1

. Este produto est protegido por uma ou mais patentes. . Este producto esta protegido por una o varias patentes. Electrical rating. Cote lectrique. Stromversorgung. . Peringkat kelistrikan. . Especi caes elctricas. Cali cacn elctrica. : x 4,37 / 4,8 V; 2 / 1,5 A CK70 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide

*930-236-001*

P/N 930-236-001 Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2010 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. Quick Start Guide Guide de dmarrage rapide de lordinateur mobile Mobilcomputer-Kurzanleitung Panduan Memulai Cepat Komputer Layap Manual de Consulta Rpida do Computador Mvel Gua de comienzo rpido para la computadora mvil CK70 10 9 8 12 11 1 7 5 6 2 4 3 SIM SD To synchronize the CK70 with your Windows PC, visit:

CK70 Windows PC CK70 Windows PC Pour synchroniser le CK70 avec votre PC Windows, allez voir:

Fr Informationen zum Synchronisieren des Modells CK70 mit Ihrem Windows-PC besuchen Sie bitte:

- CK70 Windows PC, :

Untuk menyinkronkan CK70 dengan PC Windows, kunjungi:

CK70 Windows PC CK70 Windows PC ,

Para sincronizar o CK70 com seu PC com sistema operacional Windows, visite:

CK70 , Windows, :

Para sincronizar el CK70 con su computadora Windows, visite:

Window PC www.windowsmobile.com/getstarted CK70

 

 

The CN70 ships with a partially charged battery. You can use a DX1, DX2, or DX4 multi-

dock and a power supply to charge the battery. You can also charge the battery by connecting the computer directly to an external power supply. Charging options are sold and shipped separately. To order these charging accessories, contact your local Intermec representative. Where to Find More Information www.intermec.com In the U.S.A and Canada, call 1.800.755.5505 Caution: See Compliance Insert for use restrictions associated with this product. This product is protected by one or more patents. Electrical rating: x 4,37 / 4,8 V; 2 / 1,5 A CN70 Mobile Computer 1000CP03C, 1000CP03S Quick Start Guide CN70 Mobile Computer Quick Start Guide

*930-258-001*

P/N 930-258-001 Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2011 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. CN70 10 9 8 12 11 1 7 5 6 2 4 3 SIM microSD To synchronize the CN70 with your Windows PC, visit:

www.windowsmobile.com/getstarted

 

 

70 Series Mobile Computer CK70, CK71, CN70, CN70e Users Manual Intermec Technologies Corporation Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Ave.W. Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com The information contained herein is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec Technologies Corporation. Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation. 2010 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, Beverage Routebook, CrossBar, dcBrowser, Duratherm, EasyADC, EasyCoder, EasySet, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), Intellitag, Intellitag Gen2, JANUS, LabelShop, MobileLAN, Picolink, Ready-to-Work, RoutePower, Sabre, ScanPlus, ShopScan, Smart Mobile Computing, SmartSystems, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, and Vista Powered are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation. There are U.S. and foreign patents as well as U.S. and foreign patents pending. Wi-Fi is a registered certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit

(www.openssl.org). This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (EAY@cryptsoft.com). This product uses Regex++, Index software during its operational phases. The owner of Regex++

has granted use of the software to anyone provided such use is accompanied by the following copyright and permission notice:

Regex++, Index. (Version 3.31, 16th Dec 2001) Copyright 1998-2001 Dr John Maddock Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Dr John Maddock makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided as is without express or implied warranty. ii 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Contents Before You Begin. ix Safety Information . ix Global Services and Support . ix Warranty Information. ix Web Support . ix Telephone Support . x Service Location Support . x Who Should Read This Manual . x Related Documents . xi Patent Information . xii 1 Using the Computer . 1 About the 70 Series Mobile Computers . 2 Overview of 70 Series Features . 4 About the Status LEDs . 5 70 Series Accessories . 7 About the Battery . 8 Charging the Battery . 9 Changing the Battery. 9 About Battery Status . 12 About Battery Life and Conservation . 13 About the Keypad . 14 Entering Characters on the QWERTY Keypad . 19 Entering Characters on the Numeric Keypad . 20 Entering Characters on the CK70 and CK71 Keypads . 21 About the Power Button . 21 About the Intermec Dashboard Button . 23 Configuring the Screen Backlight . 23 Adjusting the Volume . 23 Reading Bar Codes . 24 Inserting a microSD Card. 26 Transferring Files To and From Your PC . 31 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual iii Contents 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications. 33 About the User Interface. 34 About the Home Screen . 34 Interacting With the Screen . 35 Title Bar Status Icons . 36 Aligning the Screen . 39 About Intermec Applications . 39 Applications Available on the Mobile Computer . 40 Applications You Can Download to the Mobile Computer. 41 3 Using the Phone . 45 About the Phone . 46 Activating the UMTS Phone . 46 Activating the CDMA Phone . 48 Starting the Activation Wizard . 49 Turning the Phone On and Off. 49 Making a Phone Call . 50 Making an Emergency Phone Call . 50 4Using the Camera. 51 About the Color Camera. 52 Taking a Picture . 52 Recording a Video. 53 Saving Pictures and Videos to an SD Card. 53 5 Using GPS . 55 About the Integrated GPS on Your Computer . 56 Using the GPSID Installed on the Computer . 56 Improving GPS Performance on the Computer . 58 iv 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 6 Configuring the Computer . 59 Contents How to Configure the Computer . 60 Using Intermec Settings on the Computer . 60 Starting Intermec Settings . 61 About the Structure of Intermec Settings . 61 Navigating in Intermec Settings . 65 Configuring ProfileSettings With Intermec Settings . 66 Restoring Default Settings. 66 Hiding Menu Items in Intermec Settings . 67 Using Intermec Settings Remotely With SmartSystems Foundation . 67 About Network Communications . 68 Configuring 802.11b/g Radio Communications . 68 Configuring Ethernet Communications . 69 Configuring Bluetooth Communications . 69 About Serial and USB Communications . 73 Creating an ISP Connection . 74 Creating a VPN Server Connection . 75 About Wireless Security . 76 Choosing Between Microsoft and Funk Security . 77 Loading a Certificate . 88 Disabling Security . 90 7 Managing the Computer . 91 Managing the Computer in Your Network . 92 Managing the Computer Using SmartSystems. 92 Managing the Computer Using Third-Party Software . 93 Developing and Installing Applications . 93 Packaging Your Application . 94 Choosing a Target Location. 94 Installing Applications Using SmartSystems Foundation Console. 94 Installing Applications Using Microsoft ActiveSync . 95 Installing Applications Using a Storage Card . 95 Installing Applications Using the FTP Server . 96 Launching Applications Automatically . 96 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual v Contents Updating the System Software . 97 Updating Multiple Computers Using SmartSystems Console . 98 Updating Individual Mobile Computers . 99 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer . 101 About the Intermec Dashboard . 102 Troubleshooting Your Mobile Computer. 103 Troubleshooting the Wi-Fi Connection . 103 Troubleshooting 802.1x Security . 104 Checking 802.11 Network Status . 105 Troubleshooting Reading Bar Codes. 107 Troubleshooting Operating the Computer . 109 Calling Product Support. 110 Finding Your Configuration Number. 111 Finding Your Operating System Version . 111 Resetting the Computer . 111 Rebooting the Computer . 111 Cold Booting the Computer . 112 Clean Booting the Computer . 113 Cleaning the Computer. 114 ASpecifications and Default Settings . 115 Physical and Environmental Specifications. 116 CN70 Physical Dimensions . 116 CN70e Physical Dimensions . 116 CK70 Physical Dimensions . 116 CK71 Physical Dimensions . 116 Environmental Specifications . 116 Power and Electrical Specifications . 117 Operating System . 117 Hardware . 117 Back Accessory Interface Pin-outs . 117 Touch Screen Specifications . 118 Standard Communications . 118 Wireless LAN . 118 vi 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Regulatory Approvals . 118 Bar Code Symbologies. 119 Imager Reading Distances . 119 Default Configuration . 128 Data Collection . 128 Symbology Option Settings. 129 Imager Settings . 129 Decode Security Settings . 130 Communications . 130 Device Settings . 131 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual vii viii 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Before You Begin Before You Begin This section provides you with safety information, technical support information, and sources for additional product information. Safety Information Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety cautions. This section explains how to identify and understand cautions and notes that are in this document. A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data. Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances. Global Services and Support Warranty Information To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com and click Support >

Returns and Repairs > Warranty. Disclaimer of warranties: The sample code included in this document is presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent complete, tested programs. The code is provided as is with all faults. All warranties are expressly disclaimed, including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Web Support Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current manuals (in PDF). 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual ix Before You Begin Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at www.intermec.com and click Support > Knowledge Central to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product. Telephone Support In the U.S.A. and Canada, call 1-800-755-5505. Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec web site, click About Us > Contact Us. Service Location Support For the most current listing of service locations, click Support

>Returns and Repairs > Repair Locations. For technical support in South Korea, use the after service locations listed below:

AWOO Systems 102-1304 SK Ventium 522 Dangjung-dong Gunpo-si, Gyeonggi-do Korea, South 435-776 Contact: Mr. Sinbum Kang Telephone: +82-31-436-1191 Email: mjyun@awoo.co.kr IN Information System PTD LTD 6th Floor Daegu Venture Center Bldg 95 Shinchun 3 Dong Donggu, Daegu City, Korea E-mail: jmyou@idif.co.kr or korlim@gw.idif.co.kr Who Should Read This Manual This manual is written for the person who is responsible for installing, configuring, and maintaining the 70 Series Mobile Computer. This manual provides you with information about the features of the 70 Series mobile computer, and how to install, configure, operate, maintain, and troubleshoot it. x 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Before you work with the 70 Series mobile computer, you should be familiar with your network and general networking terms, such as IP address. Related Documents Before You Begin Intermec Settings Command Reference Manual Intermec Developer Library (IDL) Resource Kit Developers Guide This is a list of related Intermec documents. The Intermec web site at www.intermec.com contains our documents (as PDF files) that you can download for free. To download documents 1 Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. 2 Click the Products tab. 3 Using the Products menu, navigate to your product page. For example, to find the CN50 computer product page, click Computers > Handheld Computers > CN70. 4 Click the Manuals tab. If your product does not have its own product page, click Support >

Manuals. Use the Product Category field, the Product Family field, and the Product field to help you locate the documentation for your product. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual xi Before You Begin Patent Information Product is covered by one or more of the following patents:

4882476; 4894523; 4953113; 4961043; 4970379; 4988852; 5019699;

5021642; 5038024; 5081343; 5095197; 5144119; 5144121; 5182441;

5187355; 5187356; 5195183; 5216233; 5216550; 5195183; 5195183;

5218191; 5227614; 5233172; 5241488; 5243602; 5258606; 5278487;

5288985; 5308966; 5322991; 5331136; 5331580; 5342210; 5349678;

5359185; 5371858; 5373478; 5389770; 5397885; 5410141; 5414251;

5416463; 5442167; 5464972; 5468947; 5468950; 5477044; 5486689;

5488575; 5500516; 5502297; 5504367; 5508599; 5514858; 5530619;

5534684; 5536924; 5539191; 5541419; 5548108; 5550362; 5550364;

5565669; 5567925; 5568645; 5572007; 5576529; 5592512; 5594230;

5598007; 5608578; 5616909; 5619027; 5627360; 5640001; 5657317;

5659431; 5671436; 5672860; 5684290; 5719678; 5729003; 5742041;

5761219; 5764798; 5777308; 5777309; 5777310; 5786583; 5793604;

5798509; 5798513; 5804805; 5805807; 5811776; 5811777; 5818027;

5821523; 5828052; 5831819; 5834753; 5834749; 5837987; 5841121;

5842070; 5844222; 5854478; 5862267; 5869840; 5873070; 5877486;

5878395; 5883492; 5883493; 5886338; 5889386; 5892971; 5895906;

5898162; 5902987; 5902988; 5912452; 5923022; 5936224; 5949056;

5969321; 5969326; 5969328; 5979768; 5986435; 5987192; 5987499;

5992750; 6003775; 6012640; 6016960; 6018597; 6024289; 6034379;

6036093; 6039252; 6064763; 6075340; 6095422; 6097839; 6102289;

6102295; 6109528; 6119941; 6128414; 6138915; 6149061; 6149063;

6152370; 6155490; 6158661; 6164542; 6164545; 6173893; 6195053;

6234393; 6234395; 6244512; 6249008; 6328214; 6330975; 6345765;

6356949; 6367699; 6375075; 6375076; 6375344; 6431451; 6435411;

6484944; 6488209; 6497368; 6532152; 6538413; 6539422; 6621942;

6641046; 6681994; 6687403; 6688523; 6732930 There may be other U.S. and foreign patents pending. xii 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 1 Using the Computer This chapter introduces the 70 Series Mobile Computers with Windows Mobile 6.5. Use this chapter to learn about the basic features and functions of the each computer, as well as the available accessories for it. 1 Chapter 1 Using the Computer About the 70 Series Mobile Computers The ergonomically designed Intermec 70 Series Mobile Computers are built on the Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.5 operating system. They are lightweight, easy-to-use, and run most software developed for the Windows Mobile platform, including standalone, client-server, and browser-based applications. The 70 Series family of computers consists of four different models:

the CN70, CN70e, CK70 and CK71. T he CN70 and CN70e have the same features except that the CN70e offers extended environmental specifications and a larger keypad for data-intensive applications. The CK70 and CK71 have most of the same features, but the CK71 offers a choice of imager options and does not offer phone support. Throughout this manual, all versions of the mobile computer are referred to as 70 Series unless information is specific to a particular model of computer. In most of the users manual, pictures of the CN70 and CK70 represent the four models of the 70 Series computers. CN70 Front View Speaker Good read LED Battery status LED On/off button Notication LED Scan button 2 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer CN70 Back View Imager Camera Battery Irda port CK70 Front View Speaker Notication LED On/off button Good read LED Battery status LED Scan button 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 3 Chapter 1 Using the Computer CK70 Back View Imager Camera Irda port Battery Overview of 70 Series Features

(CK71 only) Choice of EA30, EX25, or EV12 imagers The 70 Series includes these standard features:

EA30 area imager that can read bar codes and capture signatures Multi-processor architecture with 256 MB DRAM and 1G Flash CDMA or UMTS capability (not available on CK71) Embedded GPS radio Customer-accessible microSD slot for memory cards up to 32 GB Customer-accessible SIM card slot IrDA port with speeds up to 4 MB/s 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth radios 5-megapixel color camera The 70 Series Mobile Computers with an IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n radio installed is Wi-Fi certified for interoperability with other 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN devices. 4 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual About the Status LEDs Chapter 1 Using the Computer Use the following illustrations and table to understand the status LEDs on your 70 Series computer. Not every 70 Series computer has all six status LEDs. For example, the QWERTY versions of the CN70 and CN70e do not have a Green key status LED. Location of the CN70 Status LEDs Good Read and Ready-to-Work Status LED Notication LED Battery status LED Orange key status LED Shift key status LED Green key status LED 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 5 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Location of the CK70 Status LEDs Good Read and Ready-to-Work status LED Notication LED Orange key status LED Battery status LED Green key status LED Shift key status LED Status LED Descriptions LED Notification Color Amber Good Read Ready-to-Work Blue Green Blinking blue Green Orange Red Battery Key Status Shift Description The computer is notifying you of a pending alarm or message. The computer successfully decoded a bar code. Intermec Terminal Emulator (ITE) is running and connected to the host or the computer is in a healthy state. ITE is running but not connected to the host or your computer is in an unhealthy state. See About Battery Status on page 12. The Green function key is enabled. The Orange function key is enabled. The Shift key is enabled. 6 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 70 Series Accessories Chapter 1 Using the Computer The 70 Series computer ships with a battery. All other accessories are sold and ordered separately. For help, contact your local Intermec sales representative. CN70 Accessories Accessory CN70/CN70e Battery (Model 1000AB01) CK70/CK71 Battery (Model 1001AB01) Desktop Stand Description This battery provides main power to the CN70 and CN70e. This battery provides main power to the CK70 and CK71. Use the desktop stand hold the 70 Series computer on your desk or a stable surface. Use this adapter to receive and send serial communications through a DEX/UCS connection. Use the desktop dock with the:

70 Series cup to charge the battery while it is installed in the computer. 70 Series battery cup to charge the battery. Use these charger bases with the:

70 Series cup to charge two or four batteries while they are installed in the computer. 70 Series battery cup to charge two or four batteries. DEX/UCS Snap-On Adapter

(Model 1000AA04) DX1 Desktop Dock DX2 Dual Base and DX4 Quad Base Ethernet Snap-On Adapter

(Model 1000AA01) Handstrap Replacement Kit Holster Use the Ethernet adapter to be able to connect the computer to an Ethernet network. You can order and install a replacement handstrap. Use the holster to store the computer when you need your hands free. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 7 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Accessory Magstripe Reader Snap-On Adapter (Model 1000AA06) RS-232 Snap-On Adapter

(Model 1000AA03) Scan Handle Tethered Stylus Replacement Kit USB Snap-On Adapter (Model 1000AA07) Vehicle Holder Vehicle Power Adapter (Models 9002AX01 and 9002AX02) Vocollect Snap-On Adapter

(Model 1000AA05) Description Use the magnetic stripe reader to be able to read magnetic cards with the computer. Use the RS-232 adapter to convert the connector on the bottom of the computer to a serial connector. Use the scan handle to provide better ergonomics to the computer for high-volume scanning applications. You can order and install a replacement stylus. Use this adapter to convert the bottom connector of the computer to a USB connector. Use the vehicle holder to hold your computer while you are using it in a vehicle. Use the vehicle power adapter to provide power to the computer from your vehicle. You can choose from a 3-pin or Hirose style connector. Use this adapter to be able to use the Vocollect voice solution in your warehouse. About the Battery The 70 Series computer uses a battery pack as its main power source:

Model 1000AB01 for the CN70 and CN70e Model 1001AB01 for the CK70 and CK71 The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if it is mistreated. Do not disassemble it, heat it above 100C (212F) or incinerate it. Dispose of used batteries promptly. Keep away from children. 8 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer Note: If the computer is not using external power and you remove the battery pack, the computer goes into a power off state and then cold boots. Charging the Battery You need to fully charge the battery before using your computer for the first time. To charge the battery:

Use one of the charging accessories listed in the next table. 70 Series Charging Accessories Charging Time Charging Accessory 4 hours Snap-on adapters 6 hours DX1 desktop dock and computer cup 6 hours DX1 desktop dock and battery cup 6 hours DX2 or DX4 base and computer cup 6 hours DX2 or DX4 base and battery cup CN70, CN70e, CK70, and CK71 Vehicle Power Adapter ?? hours Changing the Battery If your battery power is low, you need to either charge the battery in the computer, or replace it with a charged battery. Note: The computer resets when you remove the battery. To change the battery:

1 Save your files and close any open applications. 2 Press the Power button to suspend the computer. 3 Disconnect the handstrap from the computer. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 9 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Removing the Handstrap From a CN70 or CN70e Removing the Handstrap From a CK70 or CK71 4 Remove the battery. On the CN70 or CN70e, push the battery release toward the bottom of the computer until the battery releases and then lift it away from the computer. 10 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer On the CK70 or CK71, push the battery release toward the top of the computer until the battery releases and then lift it away from the computer. 5 Insert the top end of a fully charged battery into the computer, and press down firmly on the bottom of the battery. Make sure that the battery release tab is fully engaged. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 11 Chapter 1 Using the Computer About Battery Status Use the battery icon on the Title bar to see the power status of your battery. If you want more detailed information on your battery such as usage time or voltage, use the Intermec Dashboard. For more information on the Dashboard, see About the Intermec Dashboard on page 102. Understanding the Battery Icon Status Battery Icon Status Battery is fully charged. Battery has a high charge. Battery has a medium charge. You should be able to work for several more hours before changing batteries. Battery is low. You need to charge or replace the battery soon. Battery is critically low. You need to replace the battery now. Battery is charging. The battery is not installed. You can also use the battery status LED to see the charging status of your battery. Location of the Battery Status LED Battery status LED Understanding the Battery Status LED LED State Steady green The computer is connected to a charger and the battery is Description more than 95% charged. Blinking red The battery is low. The computer goes into Suspend mode. Charge or replace the battery. 12 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer LED State Steady red Description The computer is connected to a charger and the battery is charging. Steady amber There is a battery error. The battery may be outside the allowable charging temperature or you may need to replace it. The computer is not on external power and the battery is operating normally. About Battery Life and Conservation Off Batteries that are stored outside the computer for long periods of time slowly discharge. Intermec recommends storing the battery in a charger to maintain battery performance. Battery Conservation Tips When You Want To:

Use the computer and the Low Battery status icon appears or the Battery light comes on. Stop using the computer for 5 minutes or longer. Store the computer for more than a day. Store the battery outside the computer. Do This to Save Battery Power:

Connect the computer to an external power source. Or, save your data and press the Power button. After the computer turns off, remove the battery and insert a fully charged battery. Make sure that the low battery icon is not on the screen and the Battery LED is not on. Press and hold the Power button for about 2 seconds to suspend the computer. If you are storing the computer for a few days, like over the weekend, install a charged battery or connect the computer to a power source. If you are storing the computer for longer, remove and charge the battery, and then store both the battery and computer in a cool location. If you store the battery for several months, recharge the battery to keep it at peak performance. Store the batteries in a charger. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 13 Chapter 1 Using the Computer About the Keypad The CN70 comes with either a QWERTY keypad or a numeric keypad. The CN70e comes with either a QWERTY numeric keypad or numeric function keypad. The keypad on the CN70 computers is light-sensitive. In low light conditions, the keypad automatically lights up. CN70 QWERTY Keypad Q W RE T Y U I O P FDSA G H J K L CXZ V B N M Esc Space Enter CN70 Numeric Keypad 1 4 7 Caps GHI PQRS Esc ABC JKL TUV Space 2 5 8 0 DEF MNO WXYZ 3 6 9 Enter 14 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual CN70e QWERTY Numeric Keypad Chapter 1 Using the Computer Q W RE T Y U I O P FDSA G H J K L CXZ 1 4 7 Esc Space E N T E R V B N M 3 2 6 5 9 8 0 CN70e Numeric Function Keypad F6 F1 Esc F7 F2 Caps GHI PQRS 1 4 7 F8 ABC JKL F3 2 5 8 0 TUV Space DEF MNO F9 F4 3 6 9 WXYZ F10 F5 E N T E R 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 15 Chapter 1 Using the Computer The CK70 comes with either an alpha keypad or an alphanumeric keypad. The CK71 comes with either a numeric function keypad or an alphanumeric keypad. The keypad on the computers is light-sensitive. In low light conditions, the keypad automatically lights up. CK70 Alpha Keypad Esc Send A B End C Enter 1 4 7 F1 D F4 G F7 K

O 2 5 8 0

S

F2 E F5 H F8 L F10 P T W X F3 sym Space 3 6 9 F F6 I F9 M Q J N R

U V Insert Delete

Z Y Ctrl 16 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual CK70 Alphanumeric Keypad Chapter 1 Using the Computer Send Insert 1 4 7 Esc End Delete 3 6 9 Enter 2 5 8 0 Alt F6 F1 F7 F2 F8 F3 F9 F4 F10 F5 F11 A F12 B F18 H F24 M N G F17 F23 S T Ctrl Space F13 C F19 I O U F14 D F20 J P F15 E F21 K Q F16 F F22 L R V W X Y Z 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 17 Chapter 1 Using the Computer CK71 Numeric Function Keypad View Insert SysRq Fld-

Fld+

Fld Exit View Page Return Enter Clear PA3 PrvScr B Roll C NxtScr A D G L F Roll 8 9 5 6 3 PA2 I Attn K E H PA1 Delete 7 4 1 2 0 F2 Home F13 M J F1 F14 Reset Esc Space Return Enter N F15 O F16 F3 F4 P F17 Q F18 R F19 S F20 F5 F6 F7 F8 T F21 U F22 V F23 W F24 F9 F10 F11 F12 X Y Z Ctrl Alt 18 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual CK71 Alphanumeric Keypad Chapter 1 Using the Computer Fld Exit View Page Alt Reset Esc PrvScr Insert Fld-

7 4 1 F6 F7 F8 F9 PA1 F1 PA2 F2 PA3 F3 Autolog F4 F10 EEOF F11 F17 F23 F5 Attn A FldMk G Menu F12 B F18 Home H F24 NewLn M N Fld+

Roll Roll 8 5 2 0 Ctrl Space Delete Clear NxtScr Help 9 6 3 Return Enter F13 C F19 Hex I Mode O F14 Dup D F20 J Print P F21 F15 Erase E Keypd K SysRq Q F16 Find F F22 L Remove R S T U V W X

Y Select Z Entering Characters on the QWERTY Keypad You need to use the orange modifier key b and the Shift key y to access all characters and functions on the QWERTY keypad. To type a character:

Press the key for that character. To type a character or access a function on the overlay:

Press b and then press the key for the character or function. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 19 Chapter 1 Using the Computer To only type characters or access functions on the overlay:

Press b twice to lock the orange modifier key to stay on, and then press the keys for the characters or functions. To type a single uppercase letter:

Press y and then the letter key. To type all uppercase letters:

Press yy to turn on Caps Lock, and then press the letter keys. You can still type orange modifier characters by pressing b and then the key for that character. To turn off Caps Lock, press y. Entering Characters on the Numeric Keypad You need to use the orange modifier key b and the green modifier key c to access all characters and functions on the Numeric keypad. To type a character or access a function printed in orange on the overlay:

Press b and then press the key for the character or function. To type a character or access a function printed in green on the overlay:

Press c and then press the key for the character or function. To type letters in the upper right corner of a key:

Press c and then press the key one to three times depending on the position of the letter. For example, in the upper right corner of the 2 key there are the letters ABC:

To type c, press c 2 2 2. To type C, press c 1 and then press c 2 2 2. To only type letters:

Press c c to lock the green modifier key, and then press the key one to four times depending on the position of the letter. While the green modifier key is locked, press 1 to toggle between only uppercase and lowercase letters. To unlock the green modifier key, press c. 20 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer Note: If uppercase letters are enabled and you unlock the green modifier key, you may need to press c 1 to type lowercase letters. Entering Characters on the CK70 and CK71 Keypads You need to use the orange modifier key b, the green modifier key c, and the Shift or Caps Lock key y to access all characters and functions on the Alpha, Alphanumeric, and Numeric Function keypads. To type a character or access a function printed in orange on the overlay or in the upper left corner of a key:

Press b and then press the key for the character or function. To type a character or access a function printed in green on the overlay:

Press c and then press the key for the character or function. To type a single uppercase letter:

Press y and then the letter key. To type all uppercase letters:

Press yy to turn on Caps Lock, and then press the letter keys. You can still type orange or green modifier characters by pressing b or c and then the key for that character. To turn off Caps Lock, press y. About the Power Button When you press the Power button, a dialog appears asking how you want the button to function in the future. If you accept the default settings by doing nothing, the computer will suspend (phone is on). 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 21 Chapter 1 Using the Computer The Power Button Options Screen Use the following table to understand the Intermec Power Options. Intermec Power Options Option Hibernate Reboot Suspend Cancel Description The computer powers off all radios and internal devices not involved in saving the system state. The computer shuts down and restarts. The computer powers off all radios and internal devices not involved in saving the system state, but the phone stays on to receive calls (default). The Power Options selection is cancelled. The Intermec Power Options screen is customizable. You can use Intermec Settings to determine which options are available to end users, the timeout until the default choice is selected, or to disable the the Power Options screen. For more information on customizing the screen using Intermec Settings, see Using Intermec Settings on the Computer on page 60 or see the Intermec Settings Command Reference Manual. 22 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual About the Intermec Dashboard Button Chapter 1 Using the Computer If the Ready-to-Work light blinks, your computer may be experiencing a problem. Press the Intermec Dashboard button (m) to launch the Intermec Dashboard application to see troubleshooting and status information. For more information on Intermec Dashboard, see About the Intermec Dashboard on page 102. Configuring the Screen Backlight You can turn on the backlight to see the screen better, or you can turn off the backlight to help conserve battery power. By default, the computer goes into Screen Off mode when there is no activity. Screen Off mode turns off the backlight and display. Press a key or tap the screen to resume activity. To configure the backlight:

1 Tap the battery icon at the top of the screen, and then tap the battery icon on the horizontal scroll menu. 2 With Turn off backlight if device is not used for checked, select the timeout value (30 seconds, or 1 to 5 minutes). Adjusting the Volume You can adjust the computer volume for your needs and your environment. The volume includes sounds you hear when you tap the screen or read bar codes with the imager. You can set the volume to off, very low, low, medium, high, very high (default), or vibrate. To adjust the volume:

1 Tap the Volume icon at the top of the screen, and then tap the volume icon on the horizontal scroll menu. 2 Use your stylus or the u and d keys to adjust the volume slider to the volume you want, select Vibrate, or select Off. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 23 Chapter 1 Using the Computer You can also use the buttons on the right side of the computer to adjust the volume:

The upper button increases the volume. The lower button decreases the volume. Reading Bar Codes The 70 Series computer ships with an internal imager. Depending on the imager model in your computer, you can read 1D and 2D bar code symbologies, composite symbologies, and postal codes. You also connect the 70 Series computer to:

cordless scanners, such as the SF51 and SR61 through Bluetooth communications. For help, see Connecting to a Bluetooth Scanner on page 70. tethered scanners, such as the SR30, SR60, and SR61T through the RS-232 adapter (Model 1000AA03). Note: When the Pictures & Videos application is running, you cannot use the imager. To read a bar code:

1 Enable only the bar code symbologies that you need. 2 Use Intermec Settings to choose the predefined imager mode that best suits your environment:

Predefined Mode 1D 1D and 2D Standard 1D and 2D Bright Environment 1D and 2D Reflective Surface For Scanning Only 1D labels.

(Default) All types of bar code labels. In high ambient light, such as outdoors in the sunshine. Glossy labels. 24 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Predefined Mode Custom Chapter 1 Using the Computer For Scanning In conditions that require customized settings. For complete information about these settings, commands, and parameters, see the Intermec Settings Command Reference Manual. 3 Point the imager window at the bar code label, and hold the computer steady a few inches from the label. 4 Press the Scan button. The laser pointer and illumination beam or frame appear. Scanning With the EA30 Imager 5 Use the laser pointer as a guide and aim toward the middle of the bar code. Make sure that the illumination beam or frame covers the bar code you are trying to decode. When the computer successfully reads a bar code label, you hear a high beep, and the Good Read LED turns on briefly. 6 Release the Scan button. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 25 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Inserting a microSD Card You can use a microSD card to increase file storage and install software. The 70 Series computers support an optional 32 GB maximum capacity microSD card. Note: The computer resets when you remove the battery. To install a microSD card on a CN70 or CN70e:

1 Press the Power button to turn off the computer. 2 Remove the battery. 3 Remove the two Phillips screws and open the card access door. 26 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 4 Slide the SIM card door to the left to unlock it and open the door. Chapter 1 Using the Computer 5 Slide the microSD card door towards the top of the computer to unlock it and open the door. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 27 Chapter 1 Using the Computer 6 Slide the microSD card into place. 7 Close the microSD card door and slide it towards the bottom of the computer to lock it in place. 8 Close the SIM card door and slide it to the right to lock it in place. 9 Close the card access door and replace the two screws. 10 Install the battery. Press down firmly on the bottom of the battery, and make sure that the battery release tab is fully engaged. 11 Press the Power button. The computer cold boots. To install a microSD card on a CK70 or CK71:

1 Press the Power button to turn off the computer. 2 Remove the two screws that attach the interface adapter cover to the back of the computer. 28 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer 3 Slide the SIM card door to the left to unlock it and open the door. 4 Slide the microSD card door towards the top of the computer to unlock it and open the door. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 29 Chapter 1 Using the Computer 5 Slide the microSD card into place. 6 Close the microSD card door and slide it towards the bottom of the computer to lock it in place. 7 Close the SIM card door and slide it to the right to lock it in place. 8 Replace the interface adapter cover and attach with the two screws removed in Step 2. 9 Install the battery. Press down firmly on the bottom of the battery, and make sure that the battery release tab is fully engaged. 10 Press the Power button. The computer cold boots. 30 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Transferring Files To and From Your PC Chapter 1 Using the Computer You can use Microsoft ActiveSync (Windows XP or earlier) or Windows Mobile Device Center (Windows Vista or Windows 7) to establish a connection between your computer and a PC. After you connect to your PC, you can transfer files, synchronize files, remotely debug, and perform other device management activities. ActiveSync and Windows Mobile Device Center are a free applications available from the Microsoft web site at www.windowsmobile.com/getstarted. To establish an ActiveSync partnership between your computer and a PC, you need to physically connect your computer to your PC using these accessories:

USB snap-on adapter (Model 1000AA07) USB cable To transfer files to and from your PC:

1 Download ActiveSync from the Microsoft web site and install ActiveSync on your PC. 2 Follow the onscreen instructions to establish a partnership. When the partnership is established, the Microsoft ActiveSync screen appears on your PC. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 31 Chapter 1 Using the Computer 32 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Use this chapter to learn about the Windows Mobile 6.5 user interface and how to interact with the screen. You can also use this chapter to learn about the Intermec applications on your computer, as well as additional Intermec applications you can download. 33 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications About the User Interface The user interface for the Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.5 operating system is different from previous versions of Windows. The interface is touch-friendly and easier to navigate. Use the following sections to understand how to interact with Windows Mobile 6.5. About the Home Screen When you turn on your mobile computer, the Home screen is the first screen that appears. The Home screen contains three navigation bars:

the Title bar, the horizontal scroll bar, and the Tile bar. The Windows Mobile 6.5 Home Screen Title bar Horizontal scroll bar Tile bar Use the Title bar icons to view the current status of information such as signal strength and battery power remaining. For more information on the Title bar icons, see Title Bar Status Icons on the next page. A horizontal scroll bar appears when you tap an icon in the Title bar. This horizontal scroll bar makes it easy to access the applications associated with the Tile bar icons. The horizontal scroll bar also contains a magnifier which improves the touch experience by making parts of the screen large enough to access with your finger. 34 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications The horizontal scroll bar also replaces tabs within Windows screens and allows for easier navigation. Clock & Alarms Screen With Horizontal Scroll Bar Use the Tile bar to navigate between screens and within applications. The icons available on the Tile bar change depending on the application you are using. Interacting With the Screen The Windows Mobile 6.5 interface supports the use of gestures with the finger or stylus to move around the screen. The table below explains the supported gestures. Description Represents the left click of a mouse. Gesture Tap Double Tap Represents the left double-click of a mouse. Hold Represents the right click of a mouse when you press and hold on the screen and a context menu appears. Initiates scrolling in the direction (horizontal or vertical) the fingeror stylus moves across the screen. Press and hold on the screen and then drag in any direction. Flick Pan 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 35 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Title Bar Status Icons Clickable icons in the Title bar immediately show you the status of your network, your phone, the volume, the battery, and the time. Use the following table to understand what the icons mean. Title Bar Status Icon Descriptions Icon Description You have a new notification. You have a new text message. You have a new e-mail message. You have a new instant message. You missed a call. The speakerphone is on. The phone is roaming. An alarm it set. The microphone is on. An internet call is in progress. A Bluetooth headset is detected. An ActiveSync connection has been established. There was a problem with the ActiveSync synchronization. An ActiveSync synchronization is in progress over USB. A UMTS network is available. Connecting to a UMTS network. 36 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Icon Description A UMTS connection is active. A 3G+ network is available. An EDGE network is available. Connecting to an EDGE network. An EDGE connection is active. A GPRS network is available. Connecting to a GPRS network. A GPRS connection is active. An HSDPA network is available. Connecting to an HSDPA network. An HSDPA connection is active. Bluetooth is on. Wi-Fi is on but not connected, and no networks are detected. Wi-Fi is not connected to a network, and other networks are detected. Other wireless networks are detected. Connected to a wireless network. Synchronizing through a Wi-Fi connection. Connected to a wireless network, and other networks are detected. Information about a new wireless network is available. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 37 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Icon Description A network connection is active. A netowrk connection is inactive. The phone has maximum signal strength. The phone has no signal. The phone capability is off. The phone has no service. The phone is searching for service. Data is being transferred. A voice call is in progress. A voice call in on hold. There is no SIM card present in the computer. The volume is off and the phone is set to vibrate. The volume is on. The volume is off. The battery has a full charge. The battery has a high charge. The battery has a medium charge. The battey has a low charge. The battery has a very low charge. 38 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Icon Description The battery is attached to external power and is charging. No battery is installed in the computer. Call forwarding is on. Voice mail is off. GPS locator is off. GPS locator is on. Aligning the Screen You may need to align your screen if you tap on one area and it registers in a different part of the screen. To align the screen:

1) Tap Start (t) > Settings > System > Screen. 2) Follow the prompts on the screen to complete the alignment. Make sure you only use the stylus to complete the alignment process. About Intermec Applications Intermec provides many useful applications to help you configure, troubleshoot, and connect your computer to other devices and networks. You can also download additional applications from Intermec to help you use all of the features your 70 Series computer includes. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 39 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Applications Available on the Mobile Computer Use this table to understand some of the Intermec applications available on your computer. Intermec Applications Available on the Mobile Computer Icon ISpyWiFi Description Application ProfileSettings Use ProfileSettings toeasily configure the computer for a specific use. You can choose predefined values for the Camera, Power, and Scanning. To apply a profile setting:

Tap the Profile Setting you want to use. You will see a message that changes are saved and a check mark appears next to your choice. For more information on modifying ProfileSettings options, see Configuring ProfileSettings With Intermec Settings on page 66. Use ISpyWiFi to check your 802.11 status and diagnose what is wrong with the connection. For more information, see Checking 802.11 Network Status on page 105. You can use the iGPS application to improve the performance of GPS on your computer. For more information, see Improving GPS Performance on the Computer on page 58. Use the Wireless Center to turn radios (WiFi, Bluetooth, phone) on and off and configure settings for each radio. Use the Bluetooth Audio application to connect to a Bluetooth headset or hands-free device. For more information, see Connecting to a Bluetooth Audio Device on page 73. Use Intermec Settings to configure your computer. You can use Intermec Settings to individually configure a computer or you can use it through SmartSystems to configure all of your computers. For more information, see Using Intermec Settings on the Computer on page 60. Bluetooth Audio Intermec Settings Wireless Center iGPS 40 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Icon Application Wireless Scanning Wireless Printing Description Use the Wireless Scanning application to connect to a Bluetooth scanner. For more information, see Connecting to a Bluetooth Scanner on page 70. Use the Wireless Printing application to connect to a Bluetooth printer. For more information, see Connecting to a Bluetooth Printer on page 72. Applications You Can Download to the Mobile Computer You can download several Intermec applications from the website that extend the capabilities of your 70 Series computer. All of the applications listed below are available from the Interme website. To find the application you want, go to www.intermec.com > Support >

Downloads and then enter the information to find your 70 Series computer. About SmartSystems Foundation SmartSystems Foundation is an easy-to-use software platform that provides IT Administrators and Integrators a single, integrated portal for hands-free provisioning, deployment, and management of Intermec devices minimizing the effort spent on software upgrades, equipment monitoring, maintenance and trouble-shooting. SmartSystems Foundation provides a consistent way to manage Intermec devices including mobile computers, RFID readers, printers and bar code scanners, located on-site or remote, to make the most of limited IT resources, and lower the total cost of ownership for Intermec data collection equipment. SmartSystems Foundation can be downloaded at no charge from the Intermec web site. For more information, visit www.intermec.com\SmartSystems. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 41 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications About Features Demo Intermec Features Demo provides a simple way to explore the key features of your mobile computer. You will find applications that demonstrate scanning, document imaging, image capture, printing, GPS functionality, and the digital compass. Many of the applications that are part of Features Demo also have separate full-featured versions that you can download and license for your computer. About Intermec Launcher Intermec Launcher 1.01 is a Microsoft Windows application, designed for Intermec mobile computers, that provides a platform from which other applications may be launched while attempting to provide a locked-down environment. You can configure Intermec Launcher for your specific application requirements. You can download and use Intermec Launcher for a 60-day evaluation period. After the evaluation period expires, you will need to purchase a license. About Intermec Browser Intermec Browser is a locked-down web application for your computer that is compatible with Microsoft Internet Explorer. You can configure Intermec Browser for your specific application requirements and design your own web pages. You can download and use Intermec Browser for a 60-day evaluation period. After the evaluation period expires, you will need to purchase a license. About Intermec Connection Manager Intermec Connection Manager is a software application and API interface that provides seamless network roaming for Intermec mobile computers configured with one or more wired or wireless technologies

(Ethernet, 802.11, GPRS, CDMA). Intermec Connection Manager works in the background to automatically establish and maintain connections. You can download and use Intermec Connection Manager for a 60-day evaluation period. the evaluation period expires, you will need to purchase a license. 42 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications About Image Capture The Intermec Image Capture application is provided for use on the 70 Series computers with an EA30 imager. Image capture provides a way for users to capture a high quality grayscale image with a mobile computer. Image Capture also allows you to change settings to provide the best image possible for the conditions present. You do not need to license Image Capture. About eMDI Intermec Enhanced Mobile Document Imaging Application (eMDI) is a professional document capture application that enables you to capture images of full page documents (8.5 x 11 or A4 paper sizes). You can transfer the images from your mobile computer to a PC or server. For more information , see the Intermec Enhanced Mobile Document Imaging Users Guide. You can download and use eMDI for a 60-day evaluation period. After the evaluation period expires, you will need to purchase a license. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 43 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications 44 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 3 Using the Phone You can use the cell phone to send and receive telephone calls, as well as transmit data through cellular wide-area networks

(WANs). 45 Chapter 3 Using the Phone About the Phone The 70 series mobile computer supports two types of cellular technology:

CDMA UMTS Phone features on the computer include a speaker and a microphone. You can also use a Bluetooth headset or hands-free kit. The default setting for the phone is enabled. After you turn on the phone and activate service with your wireless carrier, you can customize the phone features and network settings. For more information, see the online help on your mobile computer. Activating the UMTS Phone You use a SIM card to activate the UMTS phone on your computer. You can purchase the SIM card from your network provider. Note: The computer resets when you remove the battery. To install the SIM card and activate the UMTS radio:

1 Press the Power button to turn off the computer. 2 Push the battery release tab forward until the battery releases, and lift the battery away from the computer. 3 Remove the two Phillips screws and open the card access door. 46 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Using the Phone 4 Slide the SIM card door to the left to unlock it and open the door. 5 Slide the SIM card into the slot in the card access door. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 47 Chapter 3 Using the Phone 6 Close the SIM card door and slide it to the right to lock it in place. 7 Close the card access door and replace the two screws. 8 Install the battery. Press down firmly on the bottom of the battery, and make sure that the battery release tab is fully engaged. 9 Press the Power button. The computer cold boots. Activating the CDMA Phone To activate the CDMA radio module in your mobile computer, you need to contact your wireless carrier and set up an account for each mobile computer. The following table lists the carriers that Intermec currently supports. If your carrier is not listed in the table, please contact Intermec product support to see if it is now supported. Currently Supported Carriers Country United States Carriers Sprint, Verizon The carrier will require the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) to start the activation process. You can find the ESN:

on a label located in the upper right corner of hte battery compartment. on the outside of the computer shipping box. 48 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Using the Phone The activation process is slightly different for each CDMA carrier. Your carrier sales contact and an Intermec representative can guide you through the process. After you supply the ESN to your carrier, they will respond with values that you must enter using the Windows Mobile Activation Wizard (if required). Some of the supported carriers do not require you to enter any values. The following table shows the carriers, the correct activation method to use, and the values that you need to activate your phone. Values Required for CDMA Phone Activation Method Activation Wizard Dial *22899 Activation Wizard Activation Values You Need Master Subsidy Lock (MSL) or activation code MDN Mobile Station Identifier (MSID) None. All parameters are automatically transferred wirelessly. After activation, the settings are permanently stored in the CDMA module. Changing the OS or SSPB loads will not affect any of hte settings or activation parameters stored in the WAN modem. Carrier Sprint Verizon Starting the Activation Wizard Depending on your wireless carrier, you may need to use the Windows Mobile Activation Wizard to activate your phone. To start the activation wizard:

1 Tap Start > Phone, or tap the Phone button on the Tile bar. The phone application starts. 2 Tap Menu ( ) > Activation Wizard. Turning the Phone On and Off Before you can start using your phone, you need to enable it. You can use Wireless Center to enable and disable your phone, as well Bluetooth and Wi-Fi communications. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 49 Chapter 3 Using the Phone To turn on the phone using Wireless Center:

1 Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Center. 2 Tap Phone to turn on the Phone 3 (Optional) To configure the phone, tap Menu in the tile bar at the bottom of the screen. 4 Tap OKwhen you are done configuring the options. 5 Tap OK to close Wireless Center. Making a Phone Call After you activate your phone, you are ready to start making phone calls. To make a phone call:

1 Press Phone. 2 Tap the keys to enter the telephone number you want to call, and tap Talk. Making an Emergency Phone Call You can use the UMTS phone to make an emergency phone call even if the SIM card is missing. When the SIM card is not installed, the phone will show that you have no service. However, if you dial certain emergency numbers (such as 112, 911, 000, 08, 118, 119, and 999) the call will go through. 50 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 4 Using the Camera You can use the color camera to take pictures and record videos. 51 Chapter 4 Using the Camera About the Color Camera The camera and flash are located on the back of the computer. You run the Pictures & Videos application to access the camera features. In this application, you can:

take, view, and edit pictures. record and launch video clips stored on the computer or a microSD card. configure camera options. You can also send pictures and video clips to others or save an image as the background on the Home screen. Note: While the Pictures & Videos application is running, you cannot use the imager. Taking a Picture You can take photos in high, normal, or low quality, with image sizes up to 2048 x 1536 pixels. When you take a picture, the image is saved as a .jpg file and stored in the /My Documents/My Pictures folder. To take a picture:

1 Tap Start > Pictures & Videos. 2 Tap the Camera icon in the grid or the Camera button on the Tile bar, or press Enter. 3 Using the screen as a viewfinder, move the camera until you have the image you want to take a picture of. 4 Tap Take Pic on the Tile bar or press Enter to take and save the picture. If you choose to save your pictures to Main memory, they are saved to permanent storage on your mobile computer. 52 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Recording a Video Chapter 4 Using the Camera You need to switch to video mode to record video. When you record video, the video is saved as an .mp4 file and stored in the /My Documents/My Pictures folder. To switch to Video mode and record video:

1 Tap Start > Pictures & Videos. 2 Tap the Camera icon in the grid or the Camera button on the Tile bar, or press Enter. 3 Tap Menu > Video. In the lower right, the camera icon turns into a video camera. On the Tile bar, the Record button replaces the Take Pic button. 4 Using the screen as a viewfinder, move the video camera until you see the scene you want to video record. 5 Tap Record on the Tile bar or press Enter to start recording. 6 When you are done, tap Stop or press Enter to stop recording and save the video. If you choose to save your videos to Main memory, they are saved to permanent storage on the computer. Saving Pictures and Videos to an SD Card Pictures and videos are automatically saved to the main memory on your computer. You can save your pictures and video to an SD card to easily transport them to another device. To save picture and video files to an SD card 1 Install a microSD card. For help, see Inserting a microSD Card on page 26. 2 Tap Start > Pictures & Videos. 3 Tap the camera icon. 4 Tap Menu > Options. 5 From the Save files to list, select SD card, and tap OK. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 53 Chapter 4 Using the Camera 54 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 5 Using GPS The 70 Series computers come equipped with an integrated Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver. It can deliver standards-based National Marine Electronics Association

(NMEA) data strings to GPS applications. 55 Chapter 5 Using GPS About the Integrated GPS on Your Computer Intermec recommends that you use the GPS Intermediate Driver

(GPSID) instead of directly accessing the GPS hardware. The GPSID is a Microsoft software component that interacts between applications and the GPS hardware. The GPSID supports Extended Ephemeris, which enhances GPS performance by:

reducing the amount of time it takes your GPS receiver to acquire a fix. eliminating the need to obtain precise satellite data information from the GPS satellites. As a Microsoft software component, the GPSID also:

allows multiple applications to simultaneously access the GPS data stream. provides access to GPS data without requiring applications to recognize and parse NMEA syntax. Using the GPSID Installed on the Computer To use the GPSID installed on your mobile computer, you need to configure the GPSID settings. To configure your GPSID settings:

1 Tap Start > Settings > System > External GPS. The GPS Settings screen appears with Programs selected. 56 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Using GPS 2 Select the COM port that you want your programs to use to get GPS data from your computer. 3 Tap Access in the horizontal scroll bar and select the Manage GPS automatically check box. 4 Tap ok. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 57 Chapter 5 Using GPS Improving GPS Performance on the Computer gpsOneXTRA Use the iGPS application to improve the performance of the GPS on your CN70, CN70e, or CK70 computer. The integrated GPS module has three operating modes:

Standalone MS assisted In Standalone mode, the GPS module relies solely on GPS satellites to determine position. In MS Assisted mode, the comptuer can determine position without receiving GPS signals directly from satellites; instead, the computer receives GPS signals and information provided by the cellular network. Even when the computer can receive a satellite signal, MS Assisted can improve position accuracy and reduce the time to determine initial position (Time-To-First-Fix). Check with your cell phone carrier for availability and pricing for MS Assisted service. Qualcomms gpsOneXTRA Assistance technology provides enhanced operation for Standalone GPS. This option enables the UMTS-enabled computer to automatically download a small assistance data file from the XTRA servers through a brief internet access session. Another option you can configure with iGPS is the fix interval. The fix interval defines how often the GPS should provide new information. Larger intervals use less power, but many applications require small intervals to work correctly. The default for fix interval is 4. Note: Anytime you change the GPS settings, the phone module will reset automatically. It will not affect the functionality of the computer. To improve GPS performance:

1) Go to Start > Settings > System > iGPS. 2) In the Fix Interval tab, enter a value for the fix interval. The default setting is 4 and should be optimized for most applications. 3) Tap the Fix Type tab and select Standalone (1), MS assisted (2), or Enable gpsOneXTRA (check box). 4) Click OK. 58 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 6 Configuring the Computer Use this chapter to learn about the available methods for configuring your mobile computer and how to use Intermec Settings. You can also use this chapter to learn how to configure network communications and wireless security. 59 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer How to Configure the Computer You can configure many parameters on the 70 Series computer such as the bar code symbologies it decodes or the network settings. The values you set for these parameters determine how the computer operates. There are several ways to configure the 70 Series computer:

Directly on the computer. You can use Intermec Settings directly on the 70 Series computer to change only the settings on that computer. For more information, see Using Intermec Settings on the Computer on page 60. Remotely using Intermec SmartSystems Foundation. When you use SmartSystems, you can remotely configure all your 70 Series computers as well as other SmartSystems-enabled Intermec computers and peripherals. For more information, see Using Intermec Settings Remotely With SmartSystems Foundation on page 67. You can use a third-party device management product that supports the 70 Series computer and Intermec Settings, such as Soti MobiControl or Wavelink Avalanche. For more information, visit the Device Management page on the Intermec web site. You can use imager configuration bar codes to enable or disable symbologies, reset to factory defaults, and set predefined imager modes. For more information, see Imager Configuration Bar Codes on page 77. You can also configure the computer with configuration bundles that you create using SmartSystems Foundation. For more information, see the SmartSystems Foundation online Help. Using Intermec Settings on the Computer Use Intermec Settings to configure parameters for Intermec applications on the 70 Series computer as well as come device-specific parameters like volume. You can configure parameters for important functions like data collection and communications. 60 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Starting Intermec Settings Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Intermec Settings is located on the Windows Mobile 6.5 System screen. To start Intermec Settings:

Tap Start > Settings > System > Intermec Settings. The Intermec Settings Main Menu appears. About the Structure of Intermec Settings Finding the parameters you want to modify in Intermec Settings can be challenging. Use the tables below to help find the parameters you want to configure. Each table contains the parameters for one of the Intermec Settings Main Menu options. If you see > next to a menu option, there are more screens available in the next level. If you see ... next to a menu option, there is only one more screen available. Most parameters are saved as soon as you tap OK. Some settings such as the Serial Port Switch require you to reboot the computer for the changes to take effect. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 61 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Data Collection Menu Data Collection Options Internal Scanner Dock Tethered Scanner Camera BT-Configure on Connect Magstripe Reader Communications Menu Communications Options Device Name 802.11 Radio Ethernet Adapter Bluetooth WWAN Radio Serial Port Switch Parameters You Can Configure Symbologies Scanner settings Imager settings Decode security Symbologies Scanner settings Scanner port settings Imager settings Decode security Symbologies Scanner settings Camera settings Decode security Bluetooth-configure on connect Enable magstripe reader Reader model (read-only) Parameters You Can Configure Device name Security choice Security settings IP settings Certificates IP settings Bluetooth settings (power, discoverable, connectable, and so on) Add WWAN connection Edit WWAN connections Manage WWAN radio WWAN information Serial port switch settings (IrDA, docking connector, and back interface) 62 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Device Settings Menu Device Settings Options Date and Time Good Read Volume Backlight Screen Keypad Power Management Compass Settings Sensors Storage Options System Component Versions IDL Runtime Versions Profiles Features Disabled by Policy Printer Menu Printer Options Printer Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Internal scanner Parameters You Can Configure Date and time settings Dock tethered scanner Bluetooth scanner Volume settings (beeper and voice, headset beeper, and vibrate mode intensity) Backlight settings (display backlight, keypad backlight, and light level) Screen rotation Scan button remapping Power button Battery power External power Compass settings (magnetic declination, magnetic inclination, and custom value) Data streaming Screen rotation Device off USB connections System component versions (read-only) ITC50 (read-only) Camera Power Scanning None (read-only) Parameters You Can Configure Printer settings (Auto detect printer, memory, display, and so on) 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 63 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer GPS Menu GPS Options GPS Bread crumbing settings SmartSystems Information Menu SmartSystems Information Options Parameters You Can Configure Identity information (hardware Identity version, firmware version, OS version, and so on) (read-only) Administrator settings (name, phone, and email) Location settings (country, state, city, campus, and detail) Device Notes (read-only) Administrator Information Location Virtual Wedge Menu Virtual Wedge Options Enable Virtual Wedge Bar Code Scanner Wedge Magstripe Reader Wedge Core Messaging Service Menu Parameters You Can Configure Enable virtual wedge Bar code scanner wedge settings (bar code scanner grid and label encoding) Magstripe Reader Grid Core Messaging Service Options Parameters You Can Configure Server IP Associated Server IP Broadcast Name Port Keep Alive Ping Interval Server IP (read-only) Associated server IP Broadcast name Port (read-only) Keep alive ping interval 64 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Device Monitor Menu Device Monitor Options Device Health Controls Device Health Screen Captures Disabled Executables Device Wipe License Manager Menu License Manager Options About License Vault Location Services Menu Location Services Options Server Virtual GPS Parameters You Can Configure Enable health data collection Enable Blue light Set rule file location Set data refresh periods Device health screen capture settings

(directory and screen capture allowed) None (read-only) Device wipe settings (enable wipe and interval) Parameters You Can Configure About settings (read-only) None (displays applications that are licensed) Parameters You Can Configure Server settings (port and enable server) Virtual GPS settings For more information on all parameters in Intermec Settings, see the Intermec Settings Command Reference Manual. Navigating in Intermec Settings You can easily navigate through the screens in Intermec Settings to find the parameter you need to configure. To move down a level in Intermec Settings:

Tap the menu item in the list. To move back a level in Intermec Settings:

Tap Back or Cancel on the Tile bar. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 65 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer To save a parameter setting:

Tap OK. To exit Intermec Settings:

Tap Menu > Exit or OK. Configuring ProfileSettings With Intermec Settings A profile is a set of predefined values that you can easily apply to the computer to ensure optimal performance in a specific scenario. The end user does not need to figure out the right settings because we have already done that work for you. ProfileSettings is available from the Start menu so you can make it available to the end user for easy configuration. Use Intermec Settings to determine the profiles you want the end user to see in the ProfileSettings application. To configure the profile information an end user can access:

1) Go to Device Settings > Profiles. 2) Select Camera, Power, or Scanning. 3) From the Camera, Power, or Scanning submenu, check or clear the Display check box for the settings you want to have available to the end user. 4) Click OK to save your selection. Restoring Default Settings You can easily restore a menu to its default settings or all of the Intermec Settings parameters to their default settings if necessary. To restore menu defaults:

1) Navigate to the menu you want to restore to defaults. 2) Tap Menu > Restore Menu Defaults. 3) When prompted, tap Yes to restore the menu default settings. 4) If prompted to refresh the computer, tap Yes. 66 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer To restore all defaults:

1) Tap Menu > Restore All Defaults. The applications asks if you are sure you want to restore all defaults. 2) Tap Yes. After several minutes, all of the default settings are restored. Hiding Menu Items in Intermec Settings You can hide items in the Intermec Settings menus if you do not want to have them available for other users to access. Hidden items are not saved when you back up your settings in the SmartSystems console. On the 70 Series computer, you can:

hide menu items by tapping and holding the item, and then choosing Hide Menu Item from the popup list. When asked if you want to hide the menu, tap Yes. restore hidden items in a single menu, by tapping and holding the menu bar where the item was hidden, and then choose Restore Item Default from the popup list. restore all hidden items in all menus, by tapping Menu > Unhide All Items. Note: When you restore default settings in Intermec Settings, only the settings for visible items are restored to defaults. The settings for hidden menu items are not affected. Using Intermec Settings Remotely With SmartSystems Foundation Your 70 Series computer is SmartSystems-enabled, which lets you open Intermec Settings from the SmartSystems console to remotely configure all of your mobile computers. For more information on SmartSystems, see Managing the Computer Using SmartSystems on page 92. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 67 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer To open Intermec Settings from the SmartSystems console:

1) In the SmartSystems console, select a mobile computer and right-click. 2) From the menu, select Intermec Settings. 3) Configure the settings you need to change. As you choose parameters from the tree structure, help for each parameter appears in the upper right pane of Intermec Settings. 4) When you are done making changes, choose File > Save Settings. For help using Intermec Settings, click Help > Contents. For information on all of the parameters in Intermec Settings, see the Intermec Settings Command Reference Manual. About Network Communications 802.11b/g radio communications. You can easily add the 70 Series to your wireless or wired data collection network. You can connect your computer using:

Ethernet communications. Bluetooth communications. USB and serial communications. Configuring 802.11b/g Radio Communications Make sure all components with antennas are at least 30 cm (1 ft) apart when power is applied. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage. The 70 Series computer contains an 802.11 radio to transfer data using wireless communications and supports the TCP/IP network protocols. This section of the manual assumes that your wireless network is set up, including your access points. 68 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer To use wireless communications in a TCP/IP network:

1 Configure these parameters on each mobile computer in the network:

Network name (SSID) IP settings (if not using DHCP) 2 Make sure the mobile computer is talking to the network and that the network can see your mobile computer. For more information, see Troubleshooting 802.1x Security on page 104. 3 Configure 802.11 security. For help, see About Wireless Security on page 76. Configuring Ethernet Communications To configure Ethernet communications, you connect your mobile computer to your Ethernet network using the Ethernet Snap-On Adapter (Model 1000AA01). To configure Ethernet communications:

1 Connect the Ethernet snap-on adapter to your mobile computer. 2 Connect the Ethernet cable from your network to the snap-on adapter. Ethernet communications are automatically enabled on your mobile computer. 3 Make sure that your computer is communicating with the network.

) should appear on the title bar. The network connection icon (

Configuring Bluetooth Communications Your 70 Series is Bluetooth-enabled, which lets you connect to other Bluetooth devices, such as scanners, printers, or audio devices. You need to turn on the Bluetooth radio before you can discover and connect to other Bluetooth devices. By default, the radio is turned off. To turn on the Bluetooth radio and configure Bluetooth settings:

1 Tap Start > Settings > Bluetooth > Mode. 2 Select the Turn on Bluetooth check box. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 69 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 3 (Optional) If you want your 70 Series to be visible to other Bluetooth devices, choose Make this device visible to other devices. 4 Tap OK. The Bluetooth radio maintains its state through a warm or cold boot and maintains virtual COM ports. But, if you clean boot your 70 Series you need to recreate pairings to devices. Connecting to a Bluetooth Scanner You can connect to an Intermec Bluetooth scanner, such as the SF51 or SR61. To connect to an Intermec Bluetooth scanner:

1 Tap Start > Settings > System > Wireless Scanning. 70 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 2 Tap Add Device. 3 Select Quick Connect, Search, or Manual. Follow the onscreen instruction to add a wireless scanner. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 71 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Connecting to a Bluetooth Printer To configure your 70 Series for Bluetooth wireless printing, you need to:

create an application that opens the wireless printing COM port on your 70 Series. For help, see the Bluetooth Resource Kit, which is part of the Intermec Developer Library (IDL), available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com/idl. select the current wireless printer on your 70 Series. For help, see the next procedure. To select the current wireless printer 1 Tap Start > Settings > System > Wireless Printing. 2 Tap Search to find a printer, or tap Manual to enter a device address. Follow the onscreen instructions to select the current wireless printer. 3 (Optional) Tap Print Test Page. The printer prints out a test page. Note: You can also print wirelessly using Microsoft APIs with Bluetooth extensions for Winsock and Bluetooth virtual COM ports. For help, see the Bluetooth Resource Kit documentation. 72 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Connecting to a Bluetooth Audio Device Use the Bluetooth Audio enabler to discover, activate, and connect to Bluetooth audio devices such as a headset. This enables system sounds to be monitored through the headset. To connect to a Bluetooth audio device:

1 Tap Start > Settings > System > Bluetooth Audio. 2 Tap Search to find your Bluetooth headset or hands-free device. 3 Select your device from the list and configure any settings. 4 Click OK when you are done. About Serial and USB Communications You can use these 70 Series accessories to transmit data to and receive data from another device through serial or USB communications:

RS-232 Snap-On Adapter (Model 1000AA03) USB Snap-On Adapter (Model 1000AA07) For more information about these accessories and how to order them, see 70 Series Accessories on page 7. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 73 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Creating an ISP Connection You can create an Internet Service Provider (ISP) connection to send and receive e-mail messages using Messaging (Outlook E-mail) and view web pages using Internet Explorer Mobile. You need to get your ISP dial-up access telephone number, a user name, and a password from your ISP. To create an ISP Connection:

1 TapStart > Settings > Connections > Connections. (Yes, you need to tap Connections twice.) 2 Under My ISP, tap Add a new modem connection. 3 Enter a name for the connection, such as ISP Connection. 4 If you are using an external modem connected to your mobile computer with a cable, select Hayes Compatible on COM1 from the Select a modem list. 5 Tap Next. 6 Enter the access phone number and then tap Next. 7 Enter the User name, Password, and Domain (if provided by an ISP or your network administrator). 8 Tap Finish. 9 On the Connections screen, tap Advanced on the horizontal scroll. 74 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 10 Tap Dialing Rules. 11 When the Enable Dialing Rules box appears, tap OK. 12 Tap Edit. 13 In the Name field, enter your phone type (Home, Mobile, or Work). 14 Tap ok until you exit the Connections screen. Creating a VPN Server Connection You can create a Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection to securely connect to servers, such as a corporate network, through the Internet. Before you can create a VPN connection, you need this information from your network administrator:

User name Password Domain name TCP/IP settings Host name or IP address of the VPN server 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 75 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer To create a VPN server connection:

1 TapStart > Settings > Connections > Connections. (Yes, you need to tap Connections twice.) 2 Under My Work Network, tap Add a new VPN server connection. 3 Step through the screens to set up your VPN connection. About Wireless Security The 70 Series provides four types of security for your wireless network:

Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 (WPA2) Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) 802.1x WEP This section explains how to configure wireless security on your 70 Series. If you choose not to use security, see Disabling Security on page 90. Intermec recommends that you always implement security. You must use either Funk or Microsoft security to implement your security solution. For details, see the next section, Choosing Between Microsoft and Funk Security on page 77. 76 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer If you are using WPA-802.1x, WPA2-802.1x, or 802.1x security, this section also assumes that your authentication server and authenticators are properly configured. Note: Your security choice does not depend on your authentication server. For example, you can choose Funk security if you use Microsoft Active Directory to issue certificates. Choosing Between Microsoft and Funk Security The 70 Series supports both Funk and Microsoft security, which dynamically select wireless networks based on your preferences. The option you choose depends on your network security needs. If you are using the 70 Series in a static environment that requires a high level of security, you should use Funk security, which offers CCX v4.0 compliance, support for LEAP and TTLS, and configuration for up to four profiles. To use Funk security, you need to select a profile. For help, see the next section, Choosing Between Microsoft and Funk Security. If you are primarily using the 70 Series to connect to Wi-Fi hotspots, you may want to use Microsoft security. To use Microsoft security, you need to select it as your security choice. For help, see Selecting Microsoft as Your Security Choice on page 82. Selecting a Funk Security Profile You can define up to four profiles for Funk security. Different profiles let your 70 Series communicate in different networks without having to change all of your security settings. For example, you may want to set up one profile for the manufacturing floor and one for the warehouse. By default, the active profile is Profile 1. Note: You can also use the Profile Wizard to configure most wireless security settings. To start the Profile Wizard, tap the iConnect icon in the lower right corner of the Today screen and select Tools > Wireless Settings. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 77 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Selecting a Funk Security Profile Use the following procedure to select a Funk security profile. 1 Start Intermec Settings. 2 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security. 3 Choose a profile. A list of configurable settings appears. 4 (Optional) In the Profile Label text box, enter a meaningful name for your profile. 5 Configure your security settings. For help, see the next sections. 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each profile you want to define. 7 Set an active profile by choosing it in the Active Profile list. 8 Save your settings. Configuring WPA Security With Funk Security Use these procedures to set WPA-802.1x, WPA2-802.1x, WPA-PSK, or WPA2-PSK security on your 70 Series with Funk security. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your 70 Series are configured. 2 Make sure Funk is selected as your security choice. 3 Start Intermec Settings. 4 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security. 5 Select the profile you want to configure. 6 For Association, choose WPA or WPA2. Encryption automatically defaults to TKIP or AES, respectively. 7 For 8021x, choose TTLS, PEAP, EAP-FAST, or TLS. 8 If you choose TTLS or PEAP:

a For Prompt for Credentials, choose Enter credentials now. Note: You can use Prompt for Credentials to troubleshoot your network connection. b Enter a User Name and User Password. c For Validate Server Certificate, choose Yes. 78 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Note: The correct date must be set on your 70 Series when you enable Validate Server Certificate. 9 If you choose TLS:

a Load a user and root certificate on your 70 Series. For help, see Loading a Certificate on page 88. b Enter a User Name and Subject Name. c For Validate Server Certificate, choose Yes. d (Optional) To increase your level of security, enter a Server 1 Common name and a Server 2 Common name. Configuring WPA or WPA2 with Funk Security Use the following procedure to configure WPA or WPA2 with Funk security. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your 70 Series are configured. 2 Make sure Funk is selected as your security choice. 3 Start Intermec Settings. 4 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security. 5 Select the profile you want to configure. 6 For Association, choose WPA or WPA2. 7 For 8021x, choose None. 8 For Pre-Shared Key, enter the pre-shared key or passphrase. The pre-shared key must be a value of 32 hex pairs preceded by 0x for a total of 66 characters. The value must match the key value on the access point. The passphrase must be from 8 to 63 characters. After you enter a passphrase, the 70 Series internally converts it to a pre-shared key. This value must match the passphrase on the authenticator. 9 Save your settings. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 79 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Configuring 802.1x Security With Funk Security Use the following procedure to configure 802.1x security with Funk security. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your 70 Series are configured. 2 Make sure Funk is selected as your security choice. 3 Start Intermec Settings. 4 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security. 5 Select the profile you want to configure. 6 For Association, choose Open. 7 For Encryption, choose WEP. 8 For 8021x, choose TTLS, PEAP, or TLS. 9 If you chose TTLS or PEAP:

a Enter a User Name. b For Prompt for Credentials, choose Enter credentials now. Note: You can use Prompt for Credentials to troubleshoot your network connection. c Enter a User Password. d For Validate Server Certificate, choose Yes. 10 If you choose TLS:

a Load a user and root certificate on your 70 Series. For help, see Loading a Certificate on page 88. b For Validate Server Certificate, choose Yes. c Enter a User Name and Subject Name. d (Optional) To increase your level of security, enter a Server 1 Common name and a Server 2 Common name. 11 (Optional) To increase your level of security, enter a Server 1 Common name and a Server 2 Common name. 12 Save your settings. 80 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Configuring LEAP Security Use the following procedure to configure LEAP security. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your 70 Series are configured. 2 Make sure Funk is selected as your security choice. 3 Start Intermec Settings. 4 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk. 5 Select the profile you want to configure. 6 For 8021x, choose LEAP. 7 For Association, choose Open, WPA, WPA2, or Network EAP. Encryption automatically defaults to TKIP if you choose WPA, AES if you choose WPA2, and WEP if you choose Open or Network EAP. 8 For Prompt for Credentials, choose Enter credentials now. 9 Enter a User Name and User Password. 10 Save your settings. Configuring Static WEP Security With Funk Security Use the following procedure to configure static WEP security with Funk. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your 70 Series are configured. 2 Make sure Funk is selected as your security choice. 3 Start Intermec Settings. 4 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security. 5 Select the profile you want to configure. 6 For Association, choose Open. 7 For Encryption, choose WEP. 8 For 8021x choose None. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 81 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 9 Define a value for the keys you want to use. You can define up to four keys (Key 1 through Key 4). Enter an ASCII key or a hex key that is either 5 bytes or 13 bytes long depending on the capability of the radio. Set a 5- byte value for 64-bit WEP or a 13-byte value for 128-bit WEP. Hex keys must be preceded by 0x and contain 5 or 13 hex pairs. 10 For Transmit key, choose the key you want to use for transmitting data. 11 Save your settings. Selecting Microsoft as Your Security Choice The default security setting is Funk. If you want to use Microsoft security, you need to select it as your security choice. After you select Microsoft as your security choice, you will be prompted to save your settings and reset your 70 Series for your change to take effect. With Microsoft as your security choice, you can configure:

WPA 802.1x Static WEP Selecting Microsoft Security Use the following procedure to select Microsoft security. 1 Start Intermec Settings. For help, see Configuring the Computer on page 59. 2 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Security Choice. 3 From the Security Choice list, select Microsoft Security. An alert box appears telling you that you must save your settings and warm boot the 70 Series for the new security choice to take effect. 4 Choose Yes. The 70 Series resets and starts with Microsoft Security as the Security Choice. 82 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Configuring WPA Security With Microsoft Security Use these procedures to set WPA-802.1x and WPA-PSK security on your 70 Series with Microsoft security 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your 70 Series are configured. 2 Start Intermec Settings. 3 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 4 For Infrastructure Mode, choose Infrastructure. 5 For Network Authentication, choose WPA. Data Encryption automatically defaults to TKIP. 6 For 802.1x Authentication, choose either MD5, TLS, or PEAP. 7 If you choose TLS:

a Choose Properties > Run App. The Auth. Settings dialog box appears. b Choose Select. c Select your certificate from the list and press Enter. The User Logon dialog box appears. d Enter a User Name and Domain and press Enter. 8 If you choose PEAP:

a Choose Properties > Run App. The Auth. Settings box appears. b Choose Validate Server and press Enter. When the radio starts to authenticate, the Network Password dialog box appears. c Enter a User Name and Password and select Save Password. d (Optional) In the Domain field, enter the Active Directory domain associated with the user account. 9 Save your settings. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 83 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Enabling WPA-PSK With Microsoft Security Use the following procedure to enable WPA-PSK With Microsoft Security. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your 70 Series are configured. 2 Start Intermec Settings. 3 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 4 For Infrastructure Mode, choose Infrastructure. 5 For Network Authentication, choose WPA-PSK. Data Encryption automatically defaults to TKIP. 6 For Pre-Shared Key, enter the pre-shared key or the passphrase. The pre-shared key must be a value of 32 hex pairs preceded by 0x for a total of 66 characters. The value must match the key value on the authenticator. The passphrase must be from 8 to 63 characters. After you enter a passphrase, the 70 Series internally converts it to a pre-shared key. 7 Save your settings. Configuring 802.1x Security with Microsoft Security Use the following procedure to configure 802.1x security with Microsoft security. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your 70 Series are configured. 2 Start Intermec Settings. 3 Choose Communications > > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 4 For Infrastructure Mode, choose Infrastructure. 5 For Network Authentication, choose Open. 6 For Data Encryption, choose WEP. 7 For 802.1X Authentication, choose TLS or PEAP. 84 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 8 If you choose TLS:

a Choose Properties > Run App. The Auth. Settings box appears. b Choose Select. c Select your certificate from the list and press Enter. The User Logon dialog box appears. d Enter a User Name and a Domain. 9 If you choose PEAP:

a Choose Properties > Run App. The Auth. Settings box appears. b Select Validate Server and press Enter. When the radio starts to authenticate, the Network Password dialog box appears. c Enter a User Name and Password and select Save Password. d (Optional) In the Domain field, enter the domain. e Press Enter. 10 For Network Key Setting, choose Automatic. 11 Save your settings. Configuring Static WEP Security With Microsoft Security Use the following procedure to configure static WEP security with Microsoft security. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your 70 Series are configured. 2 Start Intermec Settings. 3 Choose Communications > > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 4 For Network Authentication, choose Open. 5 For Network Authentication, choose WPA. Data Encryption automatically defaults to TKIP. 6 For 802.1x Authentication, choose either MD5, TLS, or PEAP. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 85 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 7 If you choose TLS:

a Choose Properties > Run App. The Auth. Settings dialog box appears. b Choose Select. c Select your certificate from the list and press Enter. The User Logon dialog box appears. d Enter a User Name and Domain and press Enter. If you choose PEAP:

e Choose Properties > Run App. The Auth. Settings box appears. f Choose Validate Server and press Enter. When the radio starts to authenticate, the Network Password dialog box appears. g Enter a User Name and Password and select Save Password. h (Optional) In the Domain field, enter the Active Directory domain associated with the user account. 8 Save your settings. Enabling WPA-PSK with Microsoft Security Use the following procedure to enable WPA-PSK with Microsoft security. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your 70 Series are configured. 2 Start Intermec Settings. 3 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 4 For Infrastructure Mode, choose Infrastructure. 5 For Network Authentication, choose WPA-PSK. Data Encryption automatically defaults to TKIP. 6 For Pre-Shared Key, enter the pre-shared key or the passphrase. The pre-shared key must be a value of 32 hex pairs preceded by 0x for a total of 66 characters. The value must match the key value on the authenticator. The passphrase must be from 8 to 63 characters. 86 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer After you enter a passphrase, the 70 Series internally converts it to a pre-shared key. This value must match the passphrase on the authenticator. 7 Save your settings. Configuring 802.1x Security with Microsoft Security Use the following procedure to configure 802.1x security with Microsoft. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your 70 Series are configured. 2 Start Intermec Settings. 3 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 4 For Infrastructure Mode, choose Infrastructure. 5 For Network Authentication, choose Open. 6 For Data Encryption, choose WEP. 7 For 802.1X Authentication, choose TLS or PEAP. 8 If you choose TLS:

a Choose Properties > Run App. The Auth. Settings box appears. b Choose Select. c Select your certificate from the list and press Enter. The User Logon dialog box appears. d Enter a User Name and a Domain. If you choose PEAP:

e Choose Properties > Run App. The Auth. Settings box appears. f Select Validate Server and press Enter. When the radio starts to authenticate, the Network Password dialog box appears. g Enter a User Name and Password and select Save Password. h (Optional) In the Domain field, enter the domain. i Press Enter. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 87 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 9 For Network Key Setting, choose Automatic. 10 Save your settings. Configuring Static WEP Security With Microsoft Security Use the following procedure to configure static WEP security with Microsoft security. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your 70 Series are configured. 2 Start Intermec Settings. 3 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 4 For Network Authentication, choose Open. 5 For Data Encryption, choose WEP. 6 For Network Key Setting, choose Enter Key and Index. 7 For Network Key Value, enter an ASCII key or a hex key that is either 5 bytes or 13 bytes long depending on the capability of the radio. Set a 5-byte value for 64-bit WEP or a 13-byte value for 128-bit WEP. Hex keys must be preceded by 0x and contain 5 or 13 hex pairs. 8 For Network Key Index, select the key you want to use for data transmission. 9 Save your settings. Loading a Certificate To use transport layer security (TLS) with WPA or 802.1x security, you need a unique client certificate on the 70 Series and a trusted root certificate authority (CA) certificate. Certificates are pieces of cryptographic data that guarantee a public key is associated with a private key. They contain a public key and the entity name that owns the key. Each certificate is issued by a certificate authority. To import a root certificate:

1 Start Intermec Settings. 88 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 2 Go to Start > Settings > System > Intermec Settings. 3 Tap Communications > 802.11 Radio > Certificates. 4 To import a root certificate:

a Select True under Import Root Certificates. b Tap Import Certificates to install the selected certificate. c In the CertImportUI screen, tap the <<< button next to the Select pfx to import text field. d Select the root certificate from the list. e Tap Import Certificate. 5 To import a certificate from an IAS server:

a Tap Import Certificates. b Tap Web Enrollment. c Enter the User, Password, and Server (IP address) to log into the server. d Tap OK. A dialog box appears asking if you want to load the root certificate. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 89 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer e Tap OK. The Enrollment Tool message box appears telling you that the certificate has been added. f Tap OK to close the message box. Disabling Security If you choose not to use security with your wireless network, you can disable it on the computer. Intermec recommends that you always set security in your network. To disable security:

1 Start Intermec Settings. For help, see Configuring the Computer on page 59. 2 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Security Choice and select Microsoft Security. An alert box appears telling you that you must save your settings and warm boot the 70 Series for the new security choice to take effect. 3 Choose Yes. The 70 Series resets and starts with Microsoft Security as the Security Choice. 4 Start Intermec Settings. 5 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 6 For Network Authentication, choose Open. 7 For Data Encryption, choose Disabled. 8 Tap OK. Your settings are saved. 90 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 7 Managing the Computer Use this chapter to learn how to remotely update, configure, and monitor your Intermec mobile computers. You will also find information on installing and developing software applications as well as how to upgrade the system software. 91 Chapter 7 Managing the Computer Managing the Computer in Your Network When you have multiple mobile computers and peripherals in your network, it is essential to have an easy way to manage updates, configure all of the devices, and remotely troubleshoot problems. Intermec provides a free device management software platform called SmartSystems to help you manage your devices. You can also purchase third-party device management software through a vendor. Managing the Computer Using SmartSystems Intermec's SmartSystems Foundation is a software platform that lets you manage all of your SmartSystems-enabled devices simultaneously from a central server. The SmartSystems console displays all SmartSystems-enabled computers and peripherals in your network. Intermec SmartSystems Foundation Console Through the Console, you can:

drag-and-drop configuration bundles, operating system updates, and firmware upgrades to multiple computers. 92 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Managing the Computer save configuration settings from a single device and deploy those settings to many devices simultaneously. remotely change settings on SmartSystems-enabled computers and peripherals. The SmartSystems console can report on asset locations and battery status, making it easier to manage your mobile devices. With an AutoDeploy license, SmartSystems can automatically push software, configuration settings, and other files to connected mobile computers. The license also enables Scan-to-Connect, which makes connecting additional mobile computers to your wireless network as easy as reading bar codes. SmartSystems Foundation can be downloaded at no charge from the Intermec web site. For more information, visit www.intermec.com\SmartSystems. To purchase an AutoDeploy license, contact your local Intermec sales representative. Managing the Computer Using Third-Party Software You can use third-party software such as Wavelink Avalanche to centrally manage your Intermec devices. Device management software enables you to update software, increase security, track your assets, and troubleshoot devices remotely. You can download the Wavelink Enabler for the CS40 from the Wavelink web site. For more information, visit the Intermec web site and search for Wavelink Avalanche or visitwww.wavelink.com to download the enabler. Developing and Installing Applications Use the Intermec Resource Kits to develop applications to run on the mobile computer. The Resource Kits are a library of C++, .NET, Java, and web components grouped by functionality that you can use to create applications for the computer. The Resource Kits are part of the Intermec Developer Library (IDL), and can be downloaded from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com/idl. For more information, see the Intermec Developer Library Resource Kit Developers Guide. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 93 Chapter 7 Managing the Computer Packaging Your Application For very simple applications, the executable file may be the only file you need to deploy. More typically, you will have a set of files to install. Intermec recommends using .cab files to install your applications. The computer uses standard Windows Mobile .cab files and will install third-party .cab files. Choosing a Target Location You can have your .cab file place your application in any of these memory locations on the mobile computer:

The ObjectStore. The optional microSD card. Depending on available disk space, you may want to consider installing your application files on the microSD card. Using a card creates the Storage Card folder on the computer. The non-volatile Flash File Store. Applications and data in the Flash File Store will persist through a clean boot. Note: The Flash File Store may be erased if you reflash the image. Files copied to any of these locations are safe when you cold boot the computer as long as the AutoRun system is installed in the appropriate location. When AutoRun is installed on the computer, all .cab files in the CabFiles folder are automatically extracted after a cold boot. For more information about AutoRun, see the Intermec Developer Library Resource Kit Developers Guide. Installing Applications Using SmartSystems Foundation Console You can use the SmartSystems console to drag-and-drop Intermec applications onto your mobile computer. The console is part of SmartSystems Foundation. 1 Download your application file from the Intermec web site and unzip it on your desktop PC. 94 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Managing the Computer 2 Double-click the application file to install it. The application file should appear in the Software Vault. 3 From the SmartSystems console in the Software Vault, drag-and-drop the application onto each mobile computer in your network, or drop the application on a group of computers contained in a folder. Installing Applications Using Microsoft ActiveSync When you only have a few computers to update with applications, you can copy files using Microsoft ActiveSync. This procedure assumes that Microsoft ActiveSync is installed on your PC and is up and running. 1 Connect to the mobile computer via ActiveSync. 2 Copy the .cab files from your development PC to the computer. 3 Warm boot or cold boot the computer. 4 After the boot process is finished, browse to the .cab files and tap the files to install them. Installing Applications Using a Storage Card Use a storage card to install applications on one computer at a time or if you have no network connection. To install applications using a storage card:

1 Copy your application file to the storage card. 2 Install the storage card in the mobile computer. 3 On the mobile computer, browse to the Storage Card folder and run your application. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 95 Chapter 7 Managing the Computer Installing Applications Using the FTP Server The mobile computer has a built-in FTP server that connects to a network through Ethernet, 802.11 a/b/g/n, or WAN (Wireless Access Network). You can use the server to transfer your application file to the computer. Because you can create FTP scripts to automate the process of copying files to the computer, this option is useful when you need to send files to a large number of computers. The easiest way to manage the FTP server is to enable the FTP menu within iConnect. To enable the FTP server:

Create this DWORD registry key and set it to a value of 1:

HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\iConnect2\IConnect\Setting s

\ShowFTPMenu The iFTP menu is available the next time you start iConnect. To manage the state of the FTP server, modify these existing registry keys where 1 = enable and 0 = disable:

HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\iConnect2\IConnect\Settings

\FtpAutoStart HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\iConnect2\IConnect\Settings

\FtpHeartbeat Launching Applications Automatically There are two ways to launch an application automatically on a cold boot:

Set up your .cab file to place a shortcut to the application in the

\Windows\StartUp directory at install time. Use AutoRun.exe to start your application at boot time. AutoRun ships on the computer and automates other operations. At boot time, AutoRun executes any commands found in its data file, AutoRun.dat. Follow the next procedure to create this data file for your mobile computer. For more information on AutoRun, see the Intermec Developer Library Resource Kit Developers Guide. 96 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Managing the Computer To configure AutoRun:

1 In Notepad, create a file called AutoUser.dat. 2 Write this command in the file:

RUN Path\AppName.exe arg1, arg2, arg3 where:

Path is the path to the directory where the application resides. AppName.exe is the application name. arg1, arg2, and arg3 are optional command line arguments. For example, to launch MyProgram.exe located in the Flash File Store, the command is EXEC Flash File Store\Apps\MyProgram.exe. Because AutoRun handles quoted file names for the first parameter, you can specify path names or file names containing white spaces. AutoRun only supports one set of quotes per command. 3 Copy AutoUser.dat to the \Windows\Startup directory on the mobile computer. Updating the System Software The mobile computer uses Image Update to update the operating system (OS) and the system software. Image Update uses incremental packages to allow for smaller and faster updates because the contents are stored in flash ROM. Update packages persist through a cold or clean boot and cannot be removed by the end user. The Image Update process also provides strengthened security because all packages are signed. Image Update packages (.pkg or .pks files) may contain elements such as DLLs, executable (.exe) files, and .cab files. You can use either of these methods to update your mobile computer:

You can update multiple computers at the same time using the SmartSystems Console. For help, see the next section, 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 97 Chapter 7 Managing the Computer You can update individual computers by transferring the packages to the mobile computer and then installing them from the mobile computer. If you are using SmartSystems Console to update the computer, you can purchase a Provisioning License to send the Image Update silently. For more information, see Sending the Image Updates Silently on page 99. Updating Multiple Computers Using SmartSystems Console You can use the SmartSystems console to update the operating system or system software on your mobile computer. The console is part of SmartSystems Foundation and is available from the Intermec web site through the Intermec Developer Library (IDL). Before you can update your mobile computer, you need:

SmartSystems Foundation. To download SmartSystems Foundation, go to www.intermec.com/idl and open the Device Management page. the SmartSystems bundles you want to install. The SmartSystems bundle contains the Image Update package file. These SmartSystems bundles are available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. Go to Support > Downloads. To update the mobile computer using SmartSystems Foundation:

1) Open the SmartSystems console. 2) Make sure the SmartSystems console and the mobile computer are on the same subnet and they are connected wirelessly or through Ethernet. 3) Make sure the mobile computer is in communications dock or a charging dock or that power management is disabled. 4) Download the SmartSystems bundle to your PC. 5) Double-click the SmartSystems bundle on your PC to extract the update files to the software vault. 6) From the SmartSystems console, locate the bundles to install and drag them to each mobile computer (or group in a folder) you want 98 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Managing the Computer to update. The SmartSystems console installs the update on your mobile computers. After the download is complete, your mobile computer begins the update process and automatically performs a cold boot. The computer then boots into a special Update Loader mode where the computer has no network connections and is completely unusable. This process can take anywhere from 30 seconds to 15 minutes depending on the update. After the update is complete, the computer boots again. 7) When a confirmation dialog box appears requesting user input, dismiss it. Note: The SmartSystems console indicates that your mobile computer is offline, by displaying a red stop symbol, until the computer reboots and reconnects to the system. Sending the Image Updates Silently If you want to automatically download and send update packages to your mobile computers, you can purchase a Provisioning license. The silent updates do not require any user intervention and begin when you choose to have the update process start. SmartSystem Foundation users are notified when update packages are released so that they can download then and update their Intermec computers. For more information, see the SmartSystems Foundation Help. Updating Individual Mobile Computers You can download update packages from your PC to the mobile computer using Microsoft ActiveSync or any other file transfer method you choose. If you need to download ActiveSync or the Windows Mobility Center, go to www.windowsmobile.com/getstarted. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 99 Chapter 7 Managing the Computer To update an individual mobile computer:

1) Download the Image Update packages you want to install from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. Go to Support >

Downloads. 2) Transfer the Image Update packages from your PC to the mobile computer. 3) On your mobile computer, tap Start > Programs > File Explorer and navigate to the location of the Image Update package. 4) Double-tap the package to start the installation. Your mobile computer begins the update process and automatically performs a cold boot. The computer then boots into a special Update Loader mode where the computer has no network connections and is completely unusable. This process can take anywhere from 30 seconds to 15 minutes depending on the update. After the update is complete, the mobile computer boots again. 5) When a confirmation dialog box appears requesting user input, dismiss it. 100 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer If you encounter any problems while using the 70 Series computer, look in this chapter to find a possible solution. You will also find information on routine maintenance. 101 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer About the Intermec Dashboard The Intermec Dashboard is designed to provide proactive monitoring of your mobile computers to prevent downtime. You can easily see the health of the device and can help pinpoint the source of a problem to determine if its hardware or software related. Intermec Dashboard displays information such as the status of network connections, battery usage, storage space, and internal devices. It also provides system information such as the operating system, firmware, and hardware configuration. To launch the Intermec Dashboard:

Press the Intermec Dashboard button (m). Intermec Dashboard Main Screen Intermec Dashboard is highly integrated with SmartSystems Foundation. You can use SmartSystems Foundation to remotely monitor the health of your computers. For more information, refer to the SmartSystems online help. 102 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Troubleshooting Your Mobile Computer Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Use the troubleshooting tables in this section to fix problems with the Bluetooth connection, Wi-Fi connection, the phone, the imager, the camera, or general problems with operating the mobile computer. If you send the computer in for service, it is your responsibility to save the computer data and configuration. Intermec is responsible only for ensuring that the hardware matches the original configuration when repairing or replacing the computer. Troubleshooting the Wi-Fi Connection Use this troubleshooting table to help solve problems with your 802.11 radio connection. Problems With the Wi-Fi Connection Problem When you turn on the computer after it was suspended for a while (10 to 15 minutes or longer), it can no longer send or receive messages over the network. The computer is connected to the network and you move to a new site to collect data. Your computer now shows you are not connected to the network. The computer appears to be connected to the network, but you cannot establish a terminal emulation session with the host computer. The computer appears to be connected to the network, but the host computer is not receiving any information from the 70 Series computer. Solution Host may have deactivated or lost current terminal emulation session. In a TCP/IP direct connect network, turn off the Keep Alive message from host to maintain the TCP session while the computer is suspended. Move closer to an access point or to a different location to reestablish communications until you reconnect with the network. Any data collected while out of range is transmitted over the network. There may be a problem with the host computer, or with the connection between the access point and the host computer. Check with the network administrator to make sure the host is running and allowing users to log in to the system. There may be a problem with the connection between the access point and the host computer. Check with the network administrator or use your access point users manual. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 103 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Problem A network connection icon appears in the toolbar, but then disappears. Solution The computer may not be communicating with the intended access point. Make sure the network name matches the access point network name. Default network name is INTERMEC. The access point may not be communicating with the server. Ensure the access point is turned on, properly configured, and has 802.1x security enabled. Troubleshooting 802.1x Security Use the following table to troubleshoot problems with your 802.1x security that will prevent you from connecting to your network, such as a missing WEP key value or an incorrect password. Problem You are setting up multiple access points in a network, with different SSIDs, and the connection fails. Solution The computer does not save WEP key values when changing the SSID. Reenter the WEP key value after changing the SSID and save your changes. You should now be able to connect to the different access points. 104 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Problem The computer indicates it is not authenticated. Solution Make sure that:

the User Name and Password parameters on the computer must match the user name and password on authentication server. You may need to reenter the password on both the computer and authentication server. on your authentication server, the user and group are allowed and the group policy is allowed to log into the server. For help, see the documentation that shipped with your authentication server software. the IP address and secret key for access point must match the IP address and secret key on the authentication server. You may need to reenter the IP address and secret key on both your access point and authentication server. the authentication server software is running on the server PC. You receive a message saying The server certificate has expired or your system date is incorrect after you perform a clean boot on the computer. Date and time are not saved when you perform a clean boot. Reenter the date and time, and then save your changes. Checking 802.11 Network Status If you have trouble connecting to your 802.11 wireless network:

Make sure you have correctly set network parameters on the computer. Check your wireless security settings. Follow the next procedure to use Intermec Dashboard to verify available access points and networks, check signal strength, and view other diagnostics. If you need to contact Intermec Product Support, this information can be helpful in troubleshooting wireless network connection issues. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 105 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer To use the Intermec Dashboard to verify the network status:

1 Press the Dashboard (m) button. The Dashboard launches. 2 Tap WiFi to view the details of the WiFi status. 3 Tap Diagnostics. The ISpyWiFi diagnostics screen appears. The ISpyWiFi tab shows:

MAC address and IP address of the 802.11 radio. network association status, including the SSID and MAC address of the access point. security configuration. radio transmit power and signal strength information. 4 Tap the Scan tab to view a list of available 802.11 networks. The list includes the signal strength, channel, and MAC address for each network. Tap Scan to refresh the screen. 5 Tap the Supp tab to view radio supplicant information, including a list of supplicant events and authentication status. To verify the settings for the currently active security profile, tap Configure Profile. The Profile Wizard for the active profile appears. To try reconnecting to the network, tap Reconnect. To delete the events in the list, tap Clear Events. 6 Tap the Ping tab to run a ping test to the host. To run a ping test:

a In the Host field, enter the IP address of the host. b From the Repetitions list, choose the number of times the computer will ping the host. c Tap Ping. The graph shows the amount of time it takes for the host to return the ping. Tap List to see this information in a list format. 106 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer 7 Tap the RSSI tab to view the received signal strength of the host signal. The information box includes the current signal strength, host SSID name, MAC address, data rate, and transmit power. Tap Mark to place an arrow marker above the graph. 8 Tap the Conf tab to set up a log file that lists RSSI history. This screen includes the 802.11 radio driver version and available radio modes. To create a log file:

a Check the Log to File check box. b (Optional) Change the sample period and number of samples displayed. c Tap Log File. The Save As screen appears. d (Optional) Change the name of the saved log file, the folder to which the file will be saved, the content type (log or text), and the location. e Tap Save. Troubleshooting Reading Bar Codes Use this section to troubleshoot problems that may prevent you from being able to read a bar code such as the symbology not be enabled. Problem You cannot see a red beam of light from the imager when you press the Scan button and aim the imager at a bar code label. Solution You may be too far away from the bar code label. Try moving closer to the bar code label and scan it again. You may be reading the bar code label straight on. Change the reading angle and try again. The imager hardware trigger might be disabled in Intermec Settings. To check the setting go to Start >

Settings > Systems > Data Collection > Scanner Settings. Hardware trigger should be checked. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 107 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Problem When you release a Scan button or handle trigger, the Good Read light does not turn off. The scanner will not read the bar code label. Solution The Good Read light will remain on if you configure the computer to use continuous/edge triggering. If you configure the computer for level triggering and the Good Read light remains on, there may be a problem. Press one of the Scan buttons or pull the trigger again without scanning a bar code label. If the light is still on, contact your local Intermec representative. Aim the scanner beam to cross entire bar code label in one pass. Vary the scanning angle. Check the quality of the bar code label, Scan a bar code label that you know will scan. Compare the two bar code labels to see if the bar code quality is too low. You may need to replace the label that you cannot scan. Make sure the bar code symbology is enabled and configured correctly. Use Intermec Settings to check the symbologies. Expand Data Collection > Symbologies beneath devices listed (scanner, virtual wedge) to check and enable symbologies, then scan the bar code label again. Make sure the computer application is expecting input from a bar code. You may need to type this information instead. The scanner does not read the bar code labels quickly, or the scanning beam seems to be faint or obscured. You scan a valid bar code label to enter data for your application. The data decoded by the scan module does not match the data encoded in the bar code label. The scanner window may be dirty. Clean the window with a solution of ammonia and water. Wipe dry. Do not allow abrasive material to touch the window. The computer may have decoded the bar code label in a symbology other than the labels actual symbology. Try scanning the bar code label again. Make sure you scan the entire label. 108 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Problem The input device attached to the computer does not work well or read bar code labels very quickly. Solution Set the Scanner Model command to the specific attached input device. Check enabled bar code symbologies and enable only the symbologies being used. Troubleshooting Operating the Computer Use this section to troubleshoot problems that may prevent you from being able to operate the computer. Problem You press the Power key and nothing happens. The computer appears to be locked up and you cannot enter data. Solution The battery status LED indicates the following states:

If the battery status LED is a steady green, the battery is more than 95%

charged and computer is on a charger. If the battery status LED is blinking red, then the battery is low. Replace or charge the battery. If the battery status LED is a steady red, the main battery is on charge. If the battery status LED is amber, the computer is on charge and either the battery temperature is outside of the charging range, or the battery is defective. Press the Power key to turn off the computer, then press the Power key again to turn it on. Press and hold the Power key ten seconds to warm boot the computer. Try reloading the firmware. For help, see Updating the System Software on page 97. If the computer does not boot or reset, contact your Intermec representative for help. You tap the screen and nothing happens. Align your screen. For help, see Aligning the Screen on page 39. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 109 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Problem You cannot type a character on the keypad or you can only type uppercase or lowercase letters. Solution You may have locked a modifier key on the keypad. Press the necessary key sequence to unlock the key. For help, see About the Keypad on page 14. Calling Product Support If you cannot find the answer to your problem in the Troubleshooting the Computer section, you can visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support. If you still need help after visiting Knowledge Central, you may need to call Product Support. To talk to an Intermec Product Support representative, call:

1-800-755-5505 Before you can call Intermec Product Support, make sure you have the following information ready:

Configuration number Serial number Operating system version SmartSystems Platform Bundle (SSPB) version If you are using security, know the type (Funk or Microsoft) and the full set of parameters Power management settings If you are using terminal emulation (TE), know the version and protocol. If you are not using TE, know the language your custom application was written in and the tools you used to create it. You can find most of the information listed above in Intermec Settings. Consult your application developer for information on your custom application. 110 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Finding Your Configuration Number Use the following procedure to help you find the configuration number of your computer. Look at the label on the back of the computer. Finding Your Operating System Version Use the following procedure to help you find your mobile computers OS version. 1 Press the Intermec Dashboard (m) button to launch the Dashboard. 2 Tap the Information bar. The Information Details page appears and displays information such as the firmware version and the OS version. Resetting the Computer You rarely need to reset the computer. If the computer does not resume after pressing the Power button, or if the computer or an application locks up, you may need to reset the computer. The 70 Series computer uses the configuration currently saved in flash memory during the boot process. There are three ways to reset the computer:

Reboot Cold boot Clean boot Rebooting the Computer You may need to reboot the computer to correct conditions where an application stops responding to the system. To reboot the computer:

Press the Power button and select Reboot from the menu. The computer systematically shuts down, restarts, and goes through the initialization process. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 111 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Cold Booting the Computer In some cases where the computer completely stops responding, it may be necessary to perform a cold boot or hard reset. Because cold booting may result in data loss, use this method only if all other recovery methods have failed. Note: Cold booting the computer does not guarantee that cached disk data will be saved, so transactional data may be lost during the reset. All other data, such as configuration and network settings, is preserved. To cold boot your 70 Series computer:

1 Press the Power button to suspend the computer. 2 Remove the handstrap and the battery pack. 3 Press the Reset button in the battery compartment on the back of the computer. Reset button 4 Replace the battery and the handstrap. The mobile computer boots. When the cold boot is complete, the Home screen appears. 112 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Clean Booting the Computer Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer A clean boot erases the memory in the mobile computer, including all applications and data files found in the ObjectStore, and loads only the default files and programs required by the computer operating system. During a clean boot, the computer first looks for the Image Update files on an installed microSD card. If no card is found, the computer loads the files in the Flash File Store. Files found on a microSD card during a clean boot are copied into the Flash File Store and overwrite the existing files. If the computer seems to be locked up, try cold booting it. If this process does not work, use a clean boot to get the computer up and running for further troubleshooting. You can clean boot using the mobile computer, or you can clean boot using the SmartSystems Console:

To clean boot the computer using the mobile computer:

1 Remove the battery pack from the back of the computer. 2 With a stylus, press the Reset button in the battery cavity. 3 Insert the battery back into the computer, and immediately press and hold the Power button and Volume Down button

(the lower button on the right side). 4 Continue to hold the Power button and the Volume Down button down until you are prompted to release them. 5 Press the Volume Up button on the right side to start the cold boot. 6 Wait for the computer to load files from its ROM. To clean boot the computer using the SmartSystems Console, right click on the 70 Series computer and select Intermec Power Tools

> Clean Boot Device. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 113 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Cleaning the Computer To keep the computer in good working order, you may need to clean the imager window, color camera window, and the touch screen. Clean the windows and the touch screen as often as needed for the environment in which you are using the computer. To clean the computer, use a solution of ammonia and water. There are no user-serviceable parts inside the 70 Series computer. Opening the computer will void the warranty and may cause damage to the internal components. To clean the image window, camera window, and touch screen:

1 Press the Power button and choose to suspend the computer. 2 Dip a clean cloth towel in the ammonia solution and wring out the excess. 3 Wipe off the imager window, camera lens, and flash area. Do not allow any abrasive material to touch these surfaces. 4 Wipe dry. 114 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual A Specifications and Default Settings 115 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Physical and Environmental Specifications CN70 Physical Dimensions Dimensions 16.9 x 8.0 x 3.4 cm (6.66 x 3.14 x 1.35 in) Weight 450 g (15.2 oz) with battery CN70e Physical Dimensions Dimensions 19.5 x 8.0 x 3.4 cm (7.66 x 3.14 x 1.35 in) Weight 491 g (16.6 oz) with battery CK70 Physical Dimensions Dimensions 23.7 x 8.0 x 4.3 cm (9.33 x 3.16 x 1.69 in) Weight 562 g (19 oz) with battery CK71 Physical Dimensions Dimensions 23.7 x 8.0 x 5.0 cm (9.33 x 3.16 x 1.98 in) Weight 584 g (19.75 oz) with battery Environmental Specifications

-20C to 60C (-4F to 140F)

-20C to 60C (-4F to 140F) 0C to 45C (32F to 113F) Operating temperature Storage temperature Charging temperature Relative humidity (operating) 5% to 95% non-condensing Environmental rating Drop Specifications IP64 compliant All corners and sides from 1.8 m (6 ft) per MIL-STD 810F 116 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Power and Electrical Specifications Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Rechargeable Lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery Battery type Battery capacity 3.7V, 4000 mAh (14.8 Wh) Electrial rating x 54.3/4.8 V; 2/1,5 A Operating System Microsoft Windows Mobile 6.5.3 Hardware Main processor Radio processor Memory Persistent storage Removable storage Keypad Imaging options ARMV41, 600 MHz

????? MHz 256 MB RAM 1 GB Flash up to 32 GB user-accessible microSD card slot CN70, CN70e: QWERTY, Numeric CK70: Alpha or Alphanumeric CK71: Numeric Function or Alphanumeric 5 megapixel color camera and EA30 area imager

(all), EV12 (CK71 only), or EX25 (CK71 only) Back Accessory Interface Pin-outs The back accessory interface provides power for peripheral devices out the back of the CK70 and CK71 computers. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pin Name OTB_PWR GND OTB_RX OTB_TX OTB_I/O_Voltage OTB_ID OTB_RTS OTB_CTS I/O Output Description Power supply for peripheral DTE Data Receive Input Output DTE Data Transmit I/O Voltage Level Input BiDir One Wire Bus for ID Output DTE Ready do Send Input DTE Clear to Send 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 117 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Touch Screen Specifications Trans-reflective TFT-LCD display; QVGA color with touch panel; 240 x 320 pixels; 8.9 cm (3.5 in) diagonal active area; 5-level LED backlight control with settings. Standard Communications UMTS CDMA GPS 802.11b/g Bluetooth USB high speed 2.0 OTG Wireless LAN Standards compliant Data rates Security Certifications IEEE 802.11b/g (2.4 GHz) up to 54 Mbps 802.11i, WPA, 802.1x, WEP

(EAP-TLS, TTLS, LEAP, PEAP, EAP-FAST WPA2, WPA, Wi-Fi, Cisco Compatible Extensions

(CCX) Regulatory Approvals cULus Listed, DEMKO, NOM, BSMI, Class B FCC/ICES/EN , GOST-R 118 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Bar Code Symbologies The imagers support all of the bar code symbologies listed in the next table. Symbology AustraliaPost*

Aztec*

BPO*

Canada Post China Post Codabar Codablock A Codablock F Code 11 Code 39 Code 93 Code 128/GS1-128 DataMatrix*

Dutch Post*

EAN/UPC GS1 Composite*

GS1 DataBar Expanded GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataBar Omni-Directional Infomail Interleaved 2 of 5 Japan Post*

KoreanPost Matrix 2 of 5 Maxicode*

Micro PDF417*

MSI PDF417*

Planet*

Plessey Postnet*

QR Code*

Standard 2 of 5 SwedenPost Telepen TLC 39

* These symbologies are not supported with the EV12 imager in the CK70 or CK71. Imager Reading Distances Typical reading distances are done in an office environment using office lights (4 lux). Minimum distances are measured in the dark (0 lux). Both reading distances are provided in respective scan engine integration guides. Contact your local Intermec representative for more information. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 119 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Below are the typical and minimum standard reading distances for the 70 Series computer built with an EA30 imager. Also included are typical and minimum standard reading distances for the CK71 with an EV12 or EX25C imager. When correctly mounted, and exit window reduces reading distances by about 4% for all scan engines. Note: Minimum distances depend on the length of the bar code. EA30 Area Imager Minimum Reading Distances Minimum distances are measured in the dark (0 lux). 0"

4"

8"

12"

16"

20"

24"

28"

in 12"

8"

4"

0"

4"

8"

12"

Data Matrix 10 mils PDF417 10 mils 0.125mm/5 mils EAN/UPC 0.5 mm / 20 mils 1 mm / 40 mils 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 cm 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 120 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual EA30 Minimum Reading Distances Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Symbology Code 39 UPC/EAN 100%

Data Matrix PDF417 Minimum Distance 9.5 cm (3.74 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) 7 cm (2.76 in) 9.5 cm (3.74 in) 6 cm (2.36 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) 6.5 cm (2.56 in) 5.5 cm (2.17 in) 5.5 cm (2.17 in) 7 cm (2.76 in) Density 0.1 mm (4 mils) 0.1250 mm (5 mils) 0.5 mm (20 mils) 1 mm (40 mils) 0.33 mm (13.0 mils) 0.18 mm (7 mils) 0.25 mm (10 mils) 0.38 mm (15 mils) 0.25 mm (10 mils) 038 mm (15 mils) EA30 Area Imager Typical Reading Distances Typical distances are measured in an office environment (250 lux). Maximum Distance 10.5 cm (4.13 in) 14 cm (5.51 in) 45 cm (17.72 in) 62 cm (24.41 in) 31.5 cm (12.4 in) 15.5 cm (6.1 in) 21.5 cm (8.46 in) 31.5 cm (12.4 in) 25 cm (9.84 in) 34 cm (13.39 in) 0"

4"

8"

12"

16"

20"

24"

28"

32"

36"

in 12"

8"

4"

0"

4"

8"

12"

Data Matrix 10 mils PDF417 10 mils 0.125mm/5 mils EAN/UPC 0.5 mm / 20 mils 1 mm / 40 mils 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 cm 121 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings EA30 Typical Reading Distances Symbology Code 39 UPC/EAN 100%

Data Matrix PDF417 Density 0.1 mm (4 mils) 0.125 mm (5 mils) 0.5 mm (20 mils) 1 mm (40 mils) 0.33 mm (13.0 mils) 0.18 mm (7 mils) 0.25 mm (10 mils) 0.38 mm (15 mils) 0.25 mm (10 mils) 0.38 mm (15 mils) Minimum Distance 9.5 cm (3.74 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) 6.5 cm (2.56 in) 9.5 cm (3.74 in) 6 cm (2.36 in) 7.5 cm (2.95 in) 6 cm (2.36 in) 5.5 cm (2.17 in) 5.5 cm (2.17 in) 6.5 cm (2.56 in) Maximum Distance 11.5 cm (4.53 in) 14.5 cm (5.71 in) 50 cm (19.69 in) 75 cm (29.53 in) 34 cm (13.39 in) 16.5 cm (6.5 in) 23 cm (9.06 in) 34.5 cm (13.58 in) 26 cm (10.24 in) 37 cm (14.57 in) 122 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings EV12 Linear Imager Minimum Reading Distances The illustration below does not include the 0.12 cm (0.05 in) setback for the CK71. Minimum reading distances are measured in the dark (0 lux). 0"

in 2"

4"

6"

8"

10"

12"

14"

16"

8"

7"

6"

5"

4"

3"

2"

1"

0"

1"

2"

3"

4"

5"

6"

7"

8"

EAN/UPC 100%

0.125 mm / 5 mils 0.25 mm / 10 mils 0.5 mm / 20 mils 1 mm / 40 mils 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 cm 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 EV12 Miniumum Reading Distances With 0.12 cm (0.05 in) Setback Symbology Code 39 EAN/UPC Density 0.15 mm (6 mils) 0.25 mm (10 ils) 0.5 mm (20 mils) 1 mm (40 mils) 0.33 mm (13 mils) Minimum Distance 9.6 cm (3.8 in) 7.1 cm (2.9 in) 6.1 cm (2.5 in) 8.1 cm (3.2 in) 6.1 cm (2.5 in) Maximum Distance 17.9 cm (7.1 in) 20.9 cm (8.3 in) 26.9 cm (10.6 in) 33.9 cm (13.4 in) 22.9 cm (9.1 in) 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 123 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings EV12 LInear Imager Typical Reading Distances The illustration below does not include the 0.12 cm (0.05 in) setback for the CK71. Typical reading distances are measured in an office environment (200 lux). 0"

in 4"

8"

12"

16"

20"

24"

28"

32"

36"

16"

14"

12"

10"

8"

6"

4"

2"

0"

2"

4"

6"

8"

10"

12"

14"

16"

EAN/UPC 100%

0.125 mm / 5 mils 0.25 mm / 10 mils 0.5 mm / 20 mils 1 mm / 40 mils 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 cm 90 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 EV12 Typical Reading Distances With 0.12 cm (0.05 in) Setback Symbology Code 39 EAN/UPC Density 0.15 mm (6 mils) 0.25 mm (10 ils) 0.5 mm (20 mils) 1 mm (40 mils) 0.33 mm (13 mils) Minimum Distance 9.6 cm (3.8 in) 6.1 cm (2.5 in) 5.1 cm (2.1 in) 7.1 cm (2.9 in)**

5.1 cm (2.1 in) Maximum Distance 19.9 cm (7.9 in) 24.9 cm (9.8 in) 34.9 cm (13.8 in) 50.9 cm (20.1 in) 27.9 cm (11.0 in)

** Minimum distance depends on bar code width and scan angle. 124 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings EX25C Near-Far Range Imager Minimum Reading Distance Minimum reading distances are measured in the dark (0 lux). The following graphic does not include the 0.24 cm (0.09 in) setback for the CK71. 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 in 80 64 48 32 16 0 16 32 48 64 80 100% EAN contrast UPC 0.25 mm/10 mils 0.5 mm/20 mils 1 mm/40 mils 1.4 mm/55 mils 200 160 120 80 40 0 40 80 120 160 200 cm 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 EX25C Minimum Reading Distances With 0.24 cm (0.09 in) Setback Symbology Code 39 EAN 100%

Density 0.08 mm (3 mils) 0.1 mm (2.8 mils) 0.25 mm (10 mils) 0.5 mm (20 mils) 1 mm (40 mils) 1.3 mm (51 mils) 0.33 mm (13 mils) Minimum Distance 15 cm (5.91 in) 15 cm (5.91 in) 15 cm (5.91 in) 16 cm (6.30 in) 25 cm (9.84 in) 40 cm (15.75 in) 15 cm (5.91 in) Maximum Distance 35 cm (13.78 in) 45 cm (17.72 in) 115 cm (45.28 in) 210 cm (82.68 in) 310 cm (122.05 in) 310 cm (122.05 in) 145 cm (57.09 in) 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 125 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings EX25C Near-Far Range Imager Typical Reading Distance Typical reading distances are measured in an office environment (200 lux). The following graphics do not include the 0.24 cm (0.09 in) setback for the CK71. EX25C Near-Far Range Imager 1D Typical Reading Distances 400 440 200 280 240 360 320 160 120 80 480 40 0 in 160 128 96 64 32 0 32 64 96 128 160 100% EAN contrast UPC 0.25 mm 10 mils 0.5 mm/20 mils 1 mm/40 mils 2.5 mm/100 mils 400 320 240 160 80 0 80 160 240 320 400 cm 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 EX25C 1D Symbologies Typical Reading Distances With 0.24 cm (0.09 in) Setback Density 0.25 mm (10 mils) 0.5 mm (20 mils) 1 mm (40 mils) 1.4 mm (55 mils) 2.5 mm (100 mils) 2.5 mm (100 mils) Minimum Distance 15 cm (5.91 in) 16 cm (6.30 in) 25 cm (9.84 in) 40 cm (15.75 in)

Maximum Distance 135 cm (53.15 in) 280 cm (110.24 in) 550 cm (216.54 in) 720 cm (283.46 in) 1200 cm (472.44 in) 1300 cm (511.81 in) 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Symbology Code 39 Code 128 retro-reflective 126 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Symbology EAN 100%

Density 0.33 mm (13 mils) Minimum Distance 15 cm (5.91 in) Maximum Distance 160 cm (62.99 in)

** Minimum distance depends on bar code width and scan angle. EX25C Near-Far Range Imager 2D Typical Reading Distances 400 440 200 280 240 360 320 160 120 80 480 40 0 in 160 128 96 64 32 0 32 64 96 128 160 0.25 mm 10 mils 0.76 mm/30 mils 1.4 mm/55 mils 2.5 mm/100 mils 400 320 240 160 80 0 80 160 240 320 400 cm 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 EX25C 2D Symbologies Typical Reading Distances With 0.24 cm (0.09 in) Setback Symbology DataMatrix Density 0.25 mm (10 mils) 0.76 mm (30 mils) 1.4 mm (55 mils) 2.5 mm (100 mils) Minimum Distance 15 cm (5.91 in) 25 cm (9.84 in)

Maximum Distance 90 cm (35.43 in) 310 cm (122.05 in) 450 cm (177.17 in) 1100 cm (433.07 in)

** Minimum distance depends on bar code width and scan angle. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 127 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Default Configuration The following tables list the default values of the configuration commands supported on the computer. If you restore to factory default settings, the mobile computer uses these values. The commands are grouped by function and reflect the organization of Intermec Settings. You can configure your computer with Intermec Settings from the SmartSystems Foundation console. For detailed information on most of the commands, see the Intermec Settings Command Reference Manual. Data Collection Symbology Settings Symbology AustraliaPost Aztec BPO CanadaPost ChinaPost Codabar Codablock A Codablock F Code 11 Code 39 Code 93 Code 128/GS1-128 DataMatrix DutchPost EAN/UPC GS1 Composite GS1 DataBar Expanded GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional Infomail Default Value Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Enable Disable Enable UPC A, UPC E, EAN 8, EAN 13 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 128 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Symbology Interleaved 2 of 5 JapanPost KoreanPost Matrix 2 of 5 Maxicode Micro PDF417 MSI PDF417 Planet Plessey Postnet QR Code Standard 2 of 5 SwedenPost Telepen TLC 39 Default Value Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Symbology Option Settings Symbology Option Preamble Postamble Global Symbology ID Multicode Default Value None (disabled) None (disabled) Disable Disable Imager Settings Imager Setting Predefined Modes Signature Image Capture Document Imaging Default Value 1D and 2D Standard Disable Disable 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 129 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Decode Security Settings Decode Security Setting Consecutive Data Validation Identical Consecutive Timeout Different Consecutive Timeout Center Decoding Center Decoding Tolerance Default Value 0 300 ms 0 Disable 0 Communications Communication Settings Communication Settings Device Name Bluetooth Settings Bluetooth Settings Bluetooth Power Bluetooth Discoverable Bluetooth Connectable 802.11 Radio Settings Default Value CN50xxxxxxxxxxx Default Value Off Disable Disable 802.11 Radio Settings Allow Security Changes Radio Measurement Radio Enabled Ethernet Adapter Settings Default Value Enable 0 Enable IP Settings DHCP Default Value Enable 130 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings IP Settings DHCP Client Identifier Primary DNS Secondary DNS Primary WINS Secondary WINS Certificates Settings Default Value Null 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Default Value Certificates Settings False Import Root Certificates False Import User Certificates False Import Pac Files Ethernet Adapter IP Settings Ethernet Adapter IP Settings DHCP DHCP Client Identifier Primary DNS Secondary DNS Primary WINS Secondary WINS Default Value Enable Null Null Null Null Null Device Settings Device Settings Date Time Adjust for Daylight Time Good Read Beep Beeper Volume Default Value Null Null Disable One Beep Medium 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 131 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings 132 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2010 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual

*935-038-001*

P/N 935-038-001

 

 

70 Series Mobile Computer CK70, CK71, CN70, CN70e Users Manual Intermec Technologies Corporation Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Ave.W. Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com The information contained herein is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec Technologies Corporation. Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior notice and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation. 2011 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, Beverage Routebook, CrossBar, dcBrowser, Duratherm, EasyADC, EasyCoder, EasySet, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), Intellitag, Intellitag Gen2, JANUS, LabelShop, MobileLAN, Picolink, Ready-to-Work, RoutePower, Sabre, ScanPlus, ShopScan, Smart Mobile Computing, SmartSystems, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, and Vista Powered are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation. There are U.S. and foreign patents as well as U.S. and foreign patents pending. Wi-Fi is a registered certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. ii 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Contents Before You Begin. ix Safety Information . ix Global Services and Support . ix Warranty Information. ix Web Support . ix Telephone Support . x Service Location Support . x Who Should Read This Manual . x Related Documents . xi Patent Information . xii 1 Using the Computer . 1 About the 70 Series Mobile Computers . 2 Overview of 70 Series Features . 4 About the Status LEDs . 5 70 Series Accessories . 7 About the Battery . 8 Charging the Battery . 9 Changing the Battery. 9 About Battery Status . 12 About Battery Life and Conservation . 14 About the Keypad . 15 Entering Characters on the QWERTY Keypad . 20 Entering Characters on the Numeric Keypad . 21 Entering Characters on the CK70 and CK71 Keypads . 22 About the Power Button . 22 About the Intermec Dashboard Button . 24 Configuring the Screen Backlight . 24 Adjusting the Volume . 25 Reading Bar Codes . 26 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual iii Contents Inserting a microSD Card. 27 Installing a microSD Card in a CN70 or CN70e . 27 Installing a microSD Card in a CK70 or CK71 . 30 Transferring Files To and From Your PC . 32 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications. 35 About the User Interface. 36 About the Home Screen . 36 Interacting With the Screen . 37 Title Bar Status Icons . 38 Aligning the Screen . 41 About Intermec Applications . 41 Applications Available on the Mobile Computer . 42 Applications You Can Download to the Mobile Computer. 43 3 Using the Phone . 47 About the Phone . 48 Activating the UMTS Phone . 48 Activating the CDMA Phone . 50 Turning the Phone On and Off. 51 Making a Phone Call . 52 Making an Emergency Phone Call . 52 4Using the Camera. 53 About the Color Camera. 54 Taking a Picture . 54 Recording a Video. 55 Saving Pictures and Videos to an SD Card. 55 iv 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 5 Using GPS . 57 Contents About the Integrated GPS on Your Computer . 58 Using the GPSID Installed on the Computer . 58 Improving GPS Performance on the Computer . 59 6 Configuring the Computer . 61 How to Configure the Computer . 62 Using Intermec Settings on the Computer . 62 Starting Intermec Settings . 63 About the Structure of Intermec Settings . 63 Navigating in Intermec Settings . 68 Configuring Profile Settings With Intermec Settings . 68 Restoring Default Settings. 69 Hiding Menu Items in Intermec Settings . 69 Using Intermec Settings Remotely With SmartSystems Foundation . 70 About Network Communications . 70 Configuring 802.11a/b/g/n (Wi-Fi) Radio Communications . 70 Configuring Ethernet Communications . 71 Configuring Bluetooth Communications . 72 About Serial and USB Communications . 75 Creating an ISP Connection . 76 Creating a VPN Server Connection . 78 About Wireless Security . 79 Choosing Between Microsoft and Funk Security . 79 Loading a Certificate . 88 7 Managing the Computer . 91 Managing the Computer in Your Network . 92 Managing the Computer Using SmartSystems. 92 Managing the Computer Using Third-Party Software . 93 Developing and Installing Applications . 93 Packaging Your Application . 94 Choosing a Target Location. 94 Installing Applications Using SmartSystems Foundation Console. 94 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual v Contents Installing Applications Using Microsoft ActiveSync . 95 Installing Applications Using a Storage Card . 95 Launching Applications Automatically . 95 Updating the System Software . 96 Updating Multiple Computers Using SmartSystems Console . 97 Updating Individual Mobile Computers . 99 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer . 101 About the Intermec Dashboard . 102 Troubleshooting Your Mobile Computer. 103 Troubleshooting the Wi-Fi Connection . 103 Troubleshooting 802.1x Security . 104 Checking 802.11 Network Status . 105 Troubleshooting Reading Bar Codes. 107 Troubleshooting Operating the Computer . 108 Calling Product Support. 109 Finding Your Configuration Number. 109 Finding Your Operating System Version . 110 Resetting the Computer . 110 Rebooting the Computer . 110 Cold Booting the Computer . 110 Clean Booting the Computer . 112 Cleaning the Computer. 112 ASpecifications and Default Settings . 115 Physical and Environmental Specifications. 116 CN70 Physical Dimensions . 116 CN70e Physical Dimensions . 116 CK70 Physical Dimensions . 116 CK71 Physical Dimensions . 116 Environmental Specifications . 116 Power and Electrical Specifications . 116 Operating System . 117 Hardware . 117 Back Accessory Interface Pin-outs . 117 Touch Screen Specifications . 118 vi 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Contents Standard Communications . 118 Wireless LAN . 118 Regulatory Approvals . 118 Bar Code Symbologies. 119 Imager Reading Distances . 119 Default Configuration . 128 BKeypads and Keystrokes . 137 Standard Characters . 138 CN70 Keypads and Keystrokes . 138 CN70e Keypads and Keystrokes . 143 CK70 Keypads and Keystrokes . 147 CK71 Keypads and Keystrokes . 154 C ScanNGo Wi-Fi Configuration Bar Codes. 163 Radio Configuration Bar Codes . 164 2D Configuration Bar Codes. 164 1D Configuration Bar Codes. 165 I Index . 173 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual vii Contents viii 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Before You Begin Before You Begin This section provides you with safety information, technical support information, and sources for additional product information. Safety Information Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety cautions. This section explains how to identify and understand cautions and notes that are in this document. A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data. Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances. Global Services and Support Warranty Information To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com and click Support >

Returns and Repairs > Warranty. Disclaimer of warranties: The sample code included in this document is presented for reference only. The code does not necessarily represent complete, tested programs. The code is provided as is with all faults. All warranties are expressly disclaimed, including the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Web Support Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current manuals (in PDF). 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual ix Before You Begin Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at www.intermec.com and click Support > Knowledge Central to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product. Telephone Support In the U.S.A. and Canada, call 1-800-755-5505. Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec web site, click About Us > Contact Us. Service Location Support For the most current listing of service locations, click Support >

Returns and Repairs > Repair Locations. For technical support in South Korea, use the after service locations listed below:

AWOO Systems 102-1304 SK Ventium 522 Dangjung-dong Gunpo-si, Gyeonggi-do Korea, South 435-776 Contact: Mr. Sinbum Kang Telephone: +82-31-436-1191 Email: mjyun@awoo.co.kr IN Information System PTD LTD 6th Floor Daegu Venture Center Bldg 95 Shinchun 3 Dong Donggu, Daegu City, Korea E-mail: jmyou@idif.co.kr or korlim@gw.idif.co.kr Who Should Read This Manual This manual is written for the person who is responsible for installing, configuring, and maintaining the 70 Series Mobile Computer. This manual provides you with information about the features of the 70 Series mobile computer, and how to install, configure, operate, maintain, and troubleshoot it. x 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Before you work with the 70 Series mobile computer, you should be familiar with your network and general networking terms, such as IP address. Related Documents Before You Begin Intermec Settings Command Reference Manual Intermec Developer Library (IDL) Resource Kit Developers Guide This is a list of related Intermec documents. The Intermec web site at www.intermec.com contains our documents (as PDF files) that you can download for free. To download documents 1 Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. 2 Click the Products tab. 3 Using the Products menu, navigate to your product page. For example, to find the CN70 computer product page, click Computers > Handheld Computers > CN70. 4 Click the Manuals tab. If your product does not have its own product page, click Support >

Manuals. Use the Product Category field, the Product Family field, and the Product field to help you locate the documentation for your product. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual xi Before You Begin Patent Information Product is covered by one or more of the following patents:

4882476; 4894523; 4953113; 4961043; 4970379; 4988852; 5019699;

5021642; 5038024; 5081343; 5095197; 5144119; 5144121; 5182441;

5187355; 5187356; 5195183; 5216233; 5216550; 5195183; 5195183;

5218191; 5227614; 5233172; 5241488; 5243602; 5258606; 5278487;

5288985; 5308966; 5322991; 5331136; 5331580; 5342210; 5349678;

5359185; 5371858; 5373478; 5389770; 5397885; 5410141; 5414251;

5416463; 5442167; 5464972; 5468947; 5468950; 5477044; 5486689;

5488575; 5500516; 5502297; 5504367; 5508599; 5514858; 5530619;

5534684; 5536924; 5539191; 5541419; 5548108; 5550362; 5550364;

5565669; 5567925; 5568645; 5572007; 5576529; 5592512; 5594230;

5598007; 5608578; 5616909; 5619027; 5627360; 5640001; 5657317;

5659431; 5671436; 5672860; 5684290; 5719678; 5729003; 5742041;

5761219; 5764798; 5777308; 5777309; 5777310; 5786583; 5793604;

5798509; 5798513; 5804805; 5805807; 5811776; 5811777; 5818027;

5821523; 5828052; 5831819; 5834753; 5834749; 5837987; 5841121;

5842070; 5844222; 5854478; 5862267; 5869840; 5873070; 5877486;

5878395; 5883492; 5883493; 5886338; 5889386; 5892971; 5895906;

5898162; 5902987; 5902988; 5912452; 5923022; 5936224; 5949056;

5969321; 5969326; 5969328; 5979768; 5986435; 5987192; 5987499;

5992750; 6003775; 6012640; 6016960; 6018597; 6024289; 6034379;

6036093; 6039252; 6064763; 6075340; 6095422; 6097839; 6102289;

6102295; 6109528; 6119941; 6128414; 6138915; 6149061; 6149063;

6152370; 6155490; 6158661; 6164542; 6164545; 6173893; 6195053;

6234393; 6234395; 6244512; 6249008; 6328214; 6330975; 6345765;

6356949; 6367699; 6375075; 6375076; 6375344; 6431451; 6435411;

6484944; 6488209; 6497368; 6532152; 6538413; 6539422; 6621942;

6641046; 6681994; 6687403; 6688523; 6732930 There may be other U.S. and foreign patents pending. xii 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 1 Using the Computer This chapter introduces the 70 Series Mobile Computers with Windows Embedded Handheld operating system. Use this chapter to learn about the basic features and functions of each computer, as well as the available accessories for it. 1 Chapter 1 Using the Computer About the 70 Series Mobile Computers The ergonomically designed Intermec 70 Series Mobile Computers are built on the Microsoft Windows Embedded Handheld operating system. They are lightweight, easy-to-use, and run most software developed for the Windows Embedded platform, including standalone, client-server, and browser-based applications. The 70 Series family of computers consists of four different models:

the CN70, CN70e, CK70 and CK71. The CN70 and CN70e have the same features except that the CN70e offers a larger keypad for data-input intensive applications. The CK70 and CK71 have most of the same features, but the CK71 offers a choice of imager options and does not offer a WWAN radio option (phone). Throughout this manual, all versions of the mobile computer are referred to as 70 Series unless information is specific to a particular model of computer. In most of the users manual, pictures of the CN70 and CK70 represent the four models of the 70 Series computers. CN70 Front View Cell phone speaker Good read LED Battery status LED On/off button Microphone Notication LED Scan button 2 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer CN70 Back View Imager Camera Speaker port Battery IrDa port CK70 Front View Cell phone speaker Notication LED Good read LED Battery status LED On/off button Scan button Microphone 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 3 Chapter 1 Using the Computer CK70 and CK71 Back View Imager Camera Imager Camera Left speaker port IrDA port Left speaker port IrDA port Battery Battery Overview of 70 Series Features

(CK71 only) Choice of EA30, EX25, or EV12 imagers The 70 Series includes these standard features:

EA30 area imager that can read bar codes and capture images Multi-processor architecture with 512 MB DRAM and 1G Flash CDMA or UMTS capability (not available on CK71) GPS radio on CDMA or UMTS computers (not available on CK71) Customer-accessible microSD slot for memory cards up to 32 GB Customer-accessible SIM card slot IrDA port with speeds up to 4 Mbps 802.11a/b/g/n and Bluetooth radios 5-megapixel auto-focus color camera The 70 Series Mobile Computer with an IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n radio installed is Wi-Fi certified for interoperability with other 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN devices. 4 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual About the Status LEDs Chapter 1 Using the Computer Use the following illustrations and table to understand the status LEDs on your computer. Not every 70 Series computer has all six status LEDs. For example, the QWERTY versions of the CN70 and CN70e do not have a Green key status LED. Location of the CN70 Status LEDs Good Read and Ready-to-Work Status LED Notication LED Battery status LED Orange key status LED Shift key status LED Green key status LED 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 5 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Location of the CK70 Status LEDs Notication LED Orange key status LED Good Read and Ready-to-Work status LED Battery status LED Green key status LED Shift key status LED

(CK70 alphanumeric and CK71 function numeric) Shift key status LED

(CK70 numeric and CK71 alphanumeric) Status LED Descriptions LED Notification Good Read Ready-to-Work Blue Color Amber Green Blinking blue Green Orange Red Battery Key Status Shift Description This LED is user-programmable. The computer successfully decoded a bar code. If you have Intermec Terminal Emulator (ITE), the application is running and connected to the host. If you do not have ITE, you can configure the Ready-to-Work indicator to turn on or off to indicate a healthy state. ITE is running but not connected to the host. See About Battery Status on page 12. The Green function key is enabled. The Orange function key is enabled. The Shift key is enabled. 6 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 70 Series Accessories Chapter 1 Using the Computer The 70 Series computer ships with a battery. All other accessories are sold and ordered separately. For help, contact your local Intermec sales representative. 70 Series Accessories Accessory Audio Snap-On Adapter CK70/CK71 Battery CK70/CK71 Magstripe Reader Adapter CN70/CN70e Battery CN70/CN70e Magstripe Reader Snap-On Adapter Desktop Stand DEX/UCS Snap-On Adapter DX1 Desktop Dock with USB connectivity DX2 Dual Dock and DX4 Quad Dock. The DX2 and DX4 are available in charge-only and Ethernet configurations. Ethernet Snap-On Adapter Description Use the audio adapter to connect the computer to a headset. This battery provides main power to the CK70 and CK71. Use the magnetic stripe reader to be able to read magnetic cards with the CK70 and CK71 computer. This battery provides main power to the CN70 and CN70e. Use the magnetic stripe reader to be able to read magnetic cards with the CN70 and CN70e computer. Use the desktop stand hold the 70 Series computer on your desk or a stable surface. Use this adapter to receive and send serial communications through a DEX/UCS connection. Use the desktop dock with the:

Computer cup to charge the battery while it is installed in the computer. Battery cup to charge the battery. Use these charger bases with the:

Computer cup to charge batteries while they are installed in the computer. Battery cup to charge two batteries. Use the Ethernet adapter to be able to connect the computer to an Ethernet network. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 7 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Accessory Handstrap Replacement Kit Holster RS-232 Snap-On Adapter Scan Handle Description You can order and install a replacement handstrap for the CN70, CN70e, and CK70/CK71. Each kit contains 5 handstraps. Use the holster to store the computer when you need your hands free. Use the RS-232 adapter to convert the connector on the bottom of the computer to a serial connector. Use the scan handle to provide better ergonomics to the computer for high-volume scanning applications. Tethered Stylus Replacement Kit You can order and install a replacement USB Snap-On Adapter Vehicle Dock Vehicle Holder Vehicle Power Adapter Vocollect Snap-On Adapter stylus. Use this adapter to convert the bottom connector of the computer to a USB connector. Use the vehicle dock to provide power and hold your computer while you are using it in a vehicle. Use the vehicle holder to hold your computer while you are using it in a vehicle. Use the vehicle power adapter to provide power to the computer from your vehicle. Use this adapter to be able to use the Vocollect voice solution in your warehouse. About the Battery The computers use these rechargeable Lithium-ion battery pack as the main power source:

3.7 V, 4000 mAH (14.8 Wh) battery for the CN70 and CN70e 3.7 V, 5200 mAH (19.2 Wh) battery for the CK70 and CK71 8 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if it is mistreated. Do not disassemble it, heat it above 100C (212F) or incinerate it. Dispose of used batteries promptly. Keep away from children. Charging the Battery You need to fully charge the battery before using your computer for the first time. Use one of the charging accessories listed in the next table to charge the battery. 70 Series Charging Accessories Charging Time Charging Accessory Up to 6 hours Snap-on adapters DX1, DX2, or DX4 dock Up to 6 hours CN70, CN70e, CK70, and CK71 Vehicle Power Adapter Up to 6 hours Changing the Battery If your battery power is low, you need to either charge the battery in the computer, or replace it with a charged battery. To change the battery:

1 Save your files and close any open applications. 2 Press the Power button and choose Hibernate from the menu to suspend the computer. 3 Detach the handstrap from the computer. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 9 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Detaching the Handstrap From a CN70 or CN70e Detaching the Handstrap From a CK70 or CK71 4 Make sure the computer is hibernate mode and that the screen has turned off. 5 Remove the battery. 10 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer On the CN70 or CN70e, push the battery release toward the bottom of the computer until the battery releases and then lift it away from the computer. On the CK70 or CK71, push the battery release toward the top of the computer until the battery releases and then lift it away from the computer. 6 Insert the top end of a fully charged battery into the computer, and press down firmly on the bottom of the battery. Make sure that the battery release is fully engaged. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 11 Chapter 1 Using the Computer About Battery Status Use the battery icon on the Title bar to see the power status of your battery. If you want more detailed information on your battery such as usage time or voltage, use the Intermec Dashboard. For more information on the Dashboard, see About the Intermec Dashboard on page 102. Understanding the Battery Icon Status Battery Icon Status Battery is fully charged. Battery has a high charge. Battery has a medium charge. You should be able to work for several more hours before changing batteries. Battery is low. You need to charge or replace the battery soon. Battery is critically low. You need to replace the battery now. Battery is charging. The battery is not installed. 12 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer You can also use the battery status LED to see the charging status of your battery. Battery status LED Understanding the Battery Status LED LED State Steady green Blinking red Steady red Blinking red-amber Steady amber Off Description The computer is connected to a charger and the battery is more than 95% charged. The battery is very low. The computer will soon go into Suspend mode. Charge or replace the battery. The computer is connected to a charger and the battery is charging. The battery charging system has encountered an error. The battery is not charging. The battery is outside of the allowable charging temperature range. Charging will resume when the battery temperature is back in the acceptable range of 0 to 45C (32 to 113F). The computer is not on external power and the battery is operating normally. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 13 Chapter 1 Using the Computer About Battery Life and Conservation Batteries that are stored outside the computer for long periods of time slowly discharge. Intermec recommends storing the battery in a charger to maintain battery performance. Battery Conservation Tips When You Want To:

Use the computer and the Low Battery status icon appears or the Battery light comes on. Stop using the computer for 5 minutes or longer. Store the computer for more than a day. Store the battery outside the computer. Do This to Save Battery Power:

Connect the computer to an external power source. Or, save your data and press the Power button and select Hibernate. After the computer turns off, remove the battery and insert a fully charged battery. Make sure that the low battery icon is not on the screen and the Battery LED is not on. Press the Power button and choose Suspend to suspend the computer. If you are storing the computer for a few days, like over the weekend, install a charged battery or connect the computer to a power source. If you are storing the computer for longer, remove and charge the battery, and then store both the battery and computer in a cool location. If you store the battery for several months, recharge the battery to keep it at peak performance. Store the batteries in a charger. 14 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual About the Keypad Chapter 1 Using the Computer The CN70 comes with either a QWERTY keypad or a numeric keypad. The CN70e comes with either a QWERTY numeric keypad or numeric keypad. The computer has an ambient light sensor that detects low light and turns on the keypad backlight. By default, the keypad backlight is enabled in low light conditions. You can disable the keypad backlight to conserve power. Use Intermec Settings to configure the backlight. For help, see Using Intermec Settings on the Computer on page 62. CN70 QWERTY Keypad

Q W

FDSA

1 2 3 RE T Y U I O P G H J K L 4 7 5 8 6 9 CXZ V B N M Esc sym 0 Space Enter CN70 Numeric Keypad 1 4 7 Caps GHI PQRS Esc ABC JKL TUV Space 2 5 8 0 DEF MNO WXYZ 3 6 9 Enter 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 15 Chapter 1 Using the Computer CN70e QWERTY Numeric Keypad Q A W E R T Y FDS G H U J I K C V Z Esc X 1 4 7 B N M 3 6 9 2 5 8 0 O P L Space E N T E R CN70e Numeric Keypad F6 F1 Esc F7 F2 Caps GHI PQRS 1 4 7 F3 ABC JKL TUV Space F8 2 5 8 0 DEF F9 F4 3 6 9 MNO WXYZ F10 F5 E N T E R 16 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer The CK70 comes with either a large alpha or an alphanumeric keypad. The CK71 comes with either a numeric function keypad or an alphanumeric keypad. The computer has an ambient light sensor that detects low light and turns on the keypad backlight. By default, the keypad backlight is enabled in low light conditions. You can disable the keypad backlight to conserve power. Use Intermec Settings to configure the backlight. For help, see Using Intermec Settings on the Computer on page 62. CK70 Large Alpha Keypad Esc Send A B End C Enter 1 4 7 F1 D F4 G F7 K

O 2 5 8 0

S

F2 E F5 H F8 L F10 P T W X F3 sym Space 3 6 9 F F6 I F9 M Q J N R

U V Insert Delete

Z Y Ctrl 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 17 Chapter 1 Using the Computer CK70 Alphanumeric Keypad Send Insert 1 4 7 Esc End Delete 3 6 9 Enter 2 5 8 0 Alt F6 F1 F7 F2 F8 F3 F9 F4 F10 F5 F11 A F12 B F18 H F24 M N G F17 F23 S T Ctrl Space F13 C F19 I O U F14 D F20 J P F15 E F21 K Q F16 F F22 L R V W X Y Z 18 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer CK71 Numeric Function Keypad View Insert SysRq Fld-

Fld+

Fld Exit View Page Return Enter Clear PA3 PrvScr B Roll C NxtScr A D G L F Roll 8 9 5 6 3 PA2 I Attn K E H PA1 Delete 7 4 1 2 0 F2 Home F13 M J F1 F14 Reset Esc Space Return Enter N F15 O F16 F3 F4 P F17 Q F18 R F19 S F20 F5 F6 F7 F8 T F21 U F22 V F23 W F24 F9 F10 F11 F12 X Y Z Ctrl Alt 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 19 Chapter 1 Using the Computer CK71 Alphanumeric Keypad Fld Exit View Page Alt Reset Esc PrvScr Insert Fld-

7 4 1 F6 F7 F8 F9 PA1 F1 PA2 F2 PA3 F3 Autolog F4 F10 EEOF F11 F17 F23 F5 Attn A FldMk G Menu F12 B F18 Home H F24 NewLn M N Fld+

Roll Roll 8 5 2 0 Ctrl Space Delete Clear NxtScr Help 9 6 3 Return Enter F13 C F19 Hex I Mode O F14 Dup D F20 J Print P F21 F15 Erase E Keypd K SysRq Q F16 Find F F22 L Remove R S T U V W X

Y Select Z Entering Characters on the QWERTY Keypad You need to use the orange modifier key b and the Shift key y to access all characters and functions on the QWERTY keypad. To type a character:

Press the key for that character. To type a character or access a function on the overlay:

Press b and then press the key for the character or function. 20 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer To only type characters or access functions on the overlay:

Press b twice to lock the orange modifier key to stay on, and then press the keys for the characters or functions. To type a single uppercase letter:

Press y and then the letter key. To type all uppercase letters:

Press yy to turn on Caps Lock, and then press the letter keys. You can still type orange modifier characters by pressing b and then the key for that character. To turn off Caps Lock, press y. Entering Characters on the Numeric Keypad You need to use the orange modifier key b and the green modifier key c to access all characters and functions on the Numeric keypad. To type a character or access a function printed in orange on the overlay:

Press b and then press the key for the character or function. To type a character or access a function printed in green on the overlay:

Press c and then press the key for the character or function. To type letters in the upper right corner of a key:

Press c and then press the key one to three times depending on the position of the letter. For example, in the upper right corner of the 2 key there are the letters ABC:

To type c, press c 2 2 2. To type C, press c 1 and then press c 2 2 2. To only type letters:

Press c c to lock the green modifier key, and then press the key one to four times depending on the position of the letter. While the green modifier key is locked, press 1 to toggle between only uppercase and lowercase letters. To unlock the green modifier key, press c. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 21 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Note: If uppercase letters are enabled and you unlock the green modifier key, you may need to press c 1 to type lowercase letters. Entering Characters on the CK70 and CK71 Keypads You need to use the orange modifier key b, the green modifier key c, and the Shift or Caps Lock key y to access all characters and functions on the Alpha, Alphanumeric, and Numeric Function keypads. To type a character or access a function printed in orange on the overlay or in the upper left corner of a key:

Press b and then press the key for the character or function. To type a character or access a function printed in green on the overlay:

Press c and then press the key for the character or function. To type a single uppercase letter:

Press y and then the letter key. To type all uppercase letters:

Press yy to turn on Caps Lock, and then press the letter keys. You can still type orange or green modifier characters by pressing b or c and then the key for that character. To turn off Caps Lock, press y. About the Power Button When you press the Power button, a dialog appears with a list of power options. If you do not select a power options setting, the currently selected action (the button outlined in bold) occurs after the timeout. 22 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual The Intermec Power Options Default Screen Chapter 1 Using the Computer Use the following table to understand the Intermec Power Options. Note: The Real Time Clock (RTC) will persist through all of the power options as long as it receives power from the Real Time Clock battery. Intermec Power Options Option Hibernate

(battery swap) Suspend Description High power saving mode. Use this setting only for swapping the battery. The computer saves the current system state, registry, and file system and then powers off all radios and internal devices. You can wake the computer by pressing the Power button or connecting the computer to external power. Medium power saving mode. The computer powers off all radios and internal devices not involved in saving the system state, but the phone stays on to receive calls. This option is the default setting. You can wake the computer by pressing the Power button, pulling the scanner trigger, receiving a call, scheduling an event such as an alarm, or by connecting external power. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 23 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Option Reboot Cancel Screen Off Shutdown Description The computer does not save the current system state, but the registry and file systems are saved. The computer shuts down all running processes and restarts. The Power Options menu is cancelled. Lowest power saving mode. The screen turns off, but the phone, all radios, and internal devices stay on. Tap the screen to turn the screen back on. Very high power saving mode. The computer turns off everything. You must press Power or apply external power to restart the computer. The Intermec Power Options screen is customizable. You can use Intermec Settings to determine which options are available to end users, the timeout until the default choice is selected, the default action if no option is selected, or to disable the Power Options screen. For more information on customizing the screen using Intermec Settings, see Using Intermec Settings on the Computer on page 62 or see the Intermec Settings Command Reference Manual. About the Intermec Dashboard Button If the Ready-to-Work light blinks, your computer may be experiencing a problem. Press the Intermec Dashboard button (m) to launch the Intermec Dashboard application and view troubleshooting and status information. You can press the m button at any time to bring up the Intermec Dashboard. If the computer is not healthy, the current issues are displayed at the top of the screen. If the device is healthy, you can use the Dashboard to view device information. For more information, see About the Intermec Dashboard on page 102. Configuring the Screen Backlight The display has an ambient light sensor that automatically adjusts the backlight intensity to conserve power and ensure the display is readable. By default, the screen turns off when there is no activity with the computer. Press a key or tap the screen to resume activity. 24 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer To configure the screen backlight to turn off:

1 Tap Start > Settings > Power. 2 Tap Advanced on the horizontal scroll bar. 3 Select the screen power off settings for when the computer is on battery power or external power. To configure the screen brightness:

1 Tap Start > Settings > System > Backlight. 2 Adjust the slider to the desired brightness level. 3 Tap OK. Adjusting the Volume You can adjust the computer volume for your needs and your environment. The volume includes sounds you hear when you tap the screen or read bar codes with the imager. You can set the volume to off, very low, low, medium, high, very high (default), or vibrate. You can also use the buttons on the right side of the computer to adjust the volume:

The upper button increases the volume. The lower button decreases the volume. To adjust the volume:

1 Tap the Volume icon at the top of the screen, and then tap the volume icon on the horizontal scroll menu. 2 Use your stylus or the u and d keys to adjust the volume slider to the volume you want, select Vibrate, or select Off. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 25 Chapter 1 Using the Computer Reading Bar Codes The computer ships with an internal imager. Depending on the imager model in your computer, you can read 1D and 2D bar code symbologies, composite symbologies, and postal codes. You can also connect the computer to:

cordless scanners, such as the SF51 and SR61 through Bluetooth communications. For help, see Connecting to a Bluetooth Scanner on page 72. tethered scanners, such as the SR30, and SR61T through the RS-232 adapter (Model 1000AA03). For help, see Connecting to a Tethered Scanner on page 76. Note: When the Pictures & Videos application is running, you cannot use the imager. To read a bar code:

1 Enable only the bar code symbologies that you need. 2 Use Intermec Settings to choose the predefined imager mode that best suits your environment:

Predefined Mode 1D 1D and 2D Standard 1D and 2D Bright Environment 1D and 2D Reflective Surface For Scanning Only 1D labels.

(Default) All types of bar code labels. In high ambient light, such as outdoors in the sunshine. Glossy labels. Note: You can also select the imager predefined mode in Profile Settings by tapping Start > Profile Settings > Scanning. 3 Point the imager window at the bar code label, and hold the computer steady a few inches from the label. 4 Press the Scan button. The laser pointer and illumination beam or frame appear. 26 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Scanning With the EA30 Imager Chapter 1 Using the Computer 5 Use the laser pointer as a guide and aim toward the middle of the bar code. Make sure that the illumination beam or frame covers the bar code you are trying to decode. When the computer successfully reads a bar code label, you hear a high beep, and the Good Read LED turns on briefly. 6 Release the Scan button. Inserting a microSD Card You can use a microSD card to increase file storage and install software. The computers support an optional 32 GB maximum capacity microSD card. Note: The computer resets when you open the card access door to insert the microSD card. Make sure you completely close the card access door before you use your computer. Installing a microSD Card in a CN70 or CN70e To install a microSD card on a CN70 or CN70e:

1 Press the Power button to turn off the computer. 2 Remove the battery. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 27 Chapter 1 Using the Computer 3 Remove the two Phillips screws and open the card access door. 4 Slide the SIM card door to the left to unlock it and open the door. 28 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer 5 Slide the microSD card door towards the top of the computer to unlock it and open the door. 6 Slide the microSD card into place. 7 Close the microSD card door and slide it towards the bottom of the computer to lock it in place. 8 Close the SIM card door and slide it to the right to lock it in place. 9 Close the card access door and replace the two screws. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 29 Chapter 1 Using the Computer 10 Install the battery. Press down firmly on the bottom of the battery, and make sure that the battery release tab is fully engaged. 11 Press the Power button. The computer cold boots. Installing a microSD Card in a CK70 or CK71 To install a microSD card on a CK70 or CK71:

1 Press the Power button to turn off the computer. 2 Remove the handstrap. 3 Remove the two screws that attach the interface adapter cover to the back of the computer. 30 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 4 Slide the SIM card door to the left to unlock it and open the door. Chapter 1 Using the Computer 5 Slide the microSD card door towards the top of the computer to unlock it and open the door. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 31 Chapter 1 Using the Computer 6 Slide the microSD card into place. 7 Close the microSD card door and slide it towards the bottom of the computer to lock it in place. 8 Close the SIM card door and slide it to the right to lock it in place. 9 Replace the interface adapter cover and attach with the two screws removed in Step 2. 10 Install the battery. Press down firmly on the bottom of the battery, and make sure that the battery release tab is fully engaged. 11 Press the Power button. The computer cold boots. Transferring Files To and From Your PC You can use Microsoft ActiveSync (Windows XP or earlier) or Windows Mobile Device Center (Windows Vista or Windows 7) to establish a connection between your computer and a PC. After you connect to your PC, you can transfer files, synchronize files, remotely debug, and perform other device management activities. ActiveSync and Windows Mobile Device Center are a free applications available from the Microsoft web site at www.windowsmobile.com/getstarted. 32 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Computer To establish an ActiveSync partnership between your computer and a PC, you need to physically connect your computer to your PC using these accessories:

USB snap-on adapter (Model 1000AA07) USB cable To transfer files to and from your PC:

1 Download ActiveSync from the Microsoft web site and install ActiveSync on your PC. 2 Follow the onscreen instructions to establish a partnership. When the partnership is established, the Microsoft ActiveSync screen appears on your PC. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 33 Chapter 1 Using the Computer 34 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Use this chapter to learn about the Windows Embedded Handheld user interface and how to interact with the screen. You can also use this chapter to learn about the Intermec applications on your computer, as well as additional Intermec applications you can download. 35 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications About the User Interface The user interface for the Windows Embedded Handheld 6.5 operating system is different from previous versions of Windows Mobile. The interface is touch-friendly and easy to navigate. Use the following sections to understand how to interact with Windows Embedded Handheld 6.5. About the Home Screen When you turn on your mobile computer, the Home screen is the first screen that appears. The Home screen contains three navigation bars:

the Title bar, the horizontal scroll bar, and the Tile bar. The Windows Embedded Handheld 6.5 Home Screen Title bar Horizontal scroll bar Tile bar Use the Title bar icons to view the current status of information such as signal strength and battery power remaining. For more information on the Title bar icons, see Title Bar Status Icons on page 38 . 36 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications A horizontal scroll bar appears when you tap an icon in the Title bar. This horizontal scroll bar makes it easy to access the applications associated with the Tile bar icons. The horizontal scroll bar also contains a magnifier which improves the touch experience by making parts of the screen large enough to tap with your finger. The horizontal scroll bar also replaces tabs within Windows screens and allows for easier navigation. Clock & Alarms Screen With Horizontal Scroll Bar Use the Tile bar to navigate between screens and within applications. The icons available on the Tile bar change depending on the application you are using. Interacting With the Screen The Windows Embedded Handheld 6.5 interface supports the use of gestures with the finger or stylus to move around the screen. The table below explains the supported gestures. Description Represents the left click of a mouse. Gesture Tap Double-tap Represents the left double-click of a mouse. Hold Represents the right click of a mouse when you press and hold on the screen and a context menu appears. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 37 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Gesture Flick Pan Description Initiates scrolling in the direction (horizontal or vertical) the finger or stylus moves across the screen. Press and hold on the screen and then drag in any direction. Title Bar Status Icons Tappable icons in the Title bar immediately show you the status of your network, your phone, the volume, the battery, and the time. Use the following table to understand what the icons mean. Title Bar Status Icon Descriptions Icon Description You have a new notification. You have a new text message. You have a new e-mail message. You have a new instant message. You missed a call. The speakerphone is on. The phone is roaming. An alarm is set. The microphone is on. An internet call is in progress. A Bluetooth headset is detected. An ActiveSync connection has been established. There was a problem with the ActiveSync synchronization. 38 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Icon Description An ActiveSync synchronization is in progress over USB. A UMTS network is available. Connecting to a UMTS network. A UMTS connection is active. A 3G+ network is available. An EDGE network is available. Connecting to an EDGE network. An EDGE connection is active. A GPRS network is available. Connecting to a GPRS network. A GPRS connection is active. An HSDPA network is available. Connecting to an HSDPA network. An HSDPA connection is active. Bluetooth is on. Wi-Fi is on but not connected, and no networks are detected. Wi-Fi is not connected to a network, and other networks are detected. Other wireless networks are detected. Connected to a wireless network. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 39 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Icon Description Synchronizing through a Wi-Fi connection. Connected to a wireless network, and other networks are detected. Information about a new wireless network is available. A network connection is active. A network connection is inactive. The phone has maximum signal strength. The phone has no signal. The phone capability is off. The phone has no service. The phone is searching for service. Data is being transferred. A voice call is in progress. A voice call in on hold. There is no SIM card present in the computer. The volume is off and the phone is set to vibrate. The volume is on. The volume is off. The battery has a full charge. The battery has a high charge. 40 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Icon Description The battery has a medium charge. The battery has a low charge. The battery has a very low charge. The battery is attached to external power and is charging. No battery is installed in the computer. Call forwarding is on. Voice mail is off. GPS locator is off. GPS locator is on. Aligning the Screen You may need to align your screen if you tap on one area and it registers in a different part of the screen. Make sure you only use the stylus to complete the alignment process. To align the screen:

1 Tap Start (t) > Settings > System > Screen 2 Follow the prompts on the screen to complete the alignment process. About Intermec Applications Intermec provides many useful applications to help you configure, troubleshoot, and connect your computer to other devices and networks. You can also download additional applications from the Intermec web site to help you use all of the features of your computer. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 41 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Applications Available on the Mobile Computer Use this table to understand some of the Intermec applications available on your computer. Intermec Applications Available on the Mobile Computer Icon Application Bluetooth Audio iGPS Intermec Settings ISpyWiFi Description Use the Bluetooth Audio application to connect to a Bluetooth headset or hands-free device. For more information, see Connecting to a Bluetooth Audio Device on page 75. You can use the iGPS application to improve the performance of GPS on your computer. For more information, see Improving GPS Performance on the Computer on page 59. iGPS is only available on computers with phone capability. Use Intermec Settings to configure your computer. You can use Intermec Settings to individually configure a computer or you can use it through SmartSystems to configure all of your computers. For more information, see Using Intermec Settings on the Computer on page 62. Use ISpyWiFi to check your 802.11 status and diagnose what is wrong with the connection. For more information, see Checking 802.11 Network Status on page 105. Profile Settings Use Profile Settings to easily configure the computer for a specific use. You can choose predefined values for the Camera, Power, and Scanning. To apply a profile setting:

Tap the Profile Setting you want to use. You will see a message that changes are saved and a check mark appears next to your choice. For more information on modifying Profile Settings options, see Configuring Profile Settings With Intermec Settings on page 68. Use the Wireless Center to turn radios (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, phone) on and off and configure settings for each radio. Wireless Center 42 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications Icon Application Wireless Printing Wireless Scanning Description Use the Wireless Printing application to connect to a Bluetooth printer. For more information, see Connecting to a Bluetooth Printer on page 74. Use the Wireless Scanning application to connect to a Bluetooth scanner. For more information, see Connecting to a Bluetooth Scanner on page 72. Applications You Can Download to the Mobile Computer You can download several Intermec applications from the web site that extend the capabilities of your 70 Series computer. All of the applications listed below are available from the Intermec web site. Some of the applications require the purchase of a license to run. To find the application you want, go to www.intermec.com > Support >

Downloads and then enter the information to find your 70 Series computer. About eMDI Intermec Enhanced Mobile Document Imaging Application (eMDI) is a professional document capture application that enables you to capture images of full page documents (8.5 x 11 or A4 paper sizes) with the camera. You can transfer the images from your mobile computer to a PC or server. For more information, see the Intermec Enhanced Mobile Document Imaging Users Guide. You can download and use eMDI for a 30-day evaluation period. After the evaluation period expires, you will need to purchase a license. About Features Demo Intermec Features Demo provides a simple way to explore the key features of your mobile computer. You will find applications that demonstrate scanning, document imaging, image capture, printing, GPS functionality, and the digital compass. Many of the applications that are part of Features Demo also have separate full-featured versions that you can download and license for your computer. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 43 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications About Image Capture The Intermec Image Capture application is provided for use on the 70 Series computers with an EA30 imager. Image capture provides a way for users to capture a high quality grayscale image with a mobile computer. Image Capture also allows you to change settings to provide the best image possible for the conditions present. You do not need to license Image Capture. About Intermec Browser Intermec Browser is a locked-down web application for your computer that is compatible with Microsoft Internet Explorer. You can configure Intermec Browser for your specific application requirements and design your own web pages. You can download and use Intermec Browser for a 60-day evaluation period. After the evaluation period expires, you will need to purchase a license. About Intermec Connection Manager Intermec Connection Manager is a software application and API interface that provides seamless network roaming for Intermec mobile computers configured with one or more wired or wireless technologies

(Ethernet, 802.11, GPRS, CDMA). Intermec Connection Manager works in the background to automatically establish and maintain connections. You can download and use Intermec Connection Manager for a 60-day evaluation period. the evaluation period expires, you will need to purchase a license. About Intermec Launcher Intermec Launcher 1.01 is a Microsoft Windows application, designed for Intermec mobile computers, that provides a platform from which other applications may be launched while attempting to provide a locked-down environment. You can configure Intermec Launcher for your specific application requirements. You can download and use Intermec Launcher for a 60-day evaluation period. After the evaluation period expires, you will need to purchase a license. 44 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications About Intermec Terminal Emulator (ITE) Intermec Terminal Emulator (ITE), part of Intermec Client Pack (ICP), is the next generation of Intermecs popular terminal emulation client designed for enterprise-level data collection. It provides a consistent user interface and a common menu structure to simplify the use and management of applications running on Intermec mobile and wireless computers. ITE is packed with enhancements that improve productivity, reduce errors, and deliver fast return on investment. It supports multiple emulation protocols in a single client and has new features such as session persistence, remote management and configuration, and offers a maintenance plan to keep you up-to-date with the latest releases and upgrades. You can download and useITE for a 60-day evaluation period. After the evaluation period expires, you will need to purchase a license and maintenance plan. About SmartSystems Foundation SmartSystems Foundation is an easy-to-use software platform that provides IT Administrators and Integrators a single, integrated portal for hands-free provisioning, deployment, and management of Intermec devices minimizing the effort spent on software upgrades, equipment monitoring, maintenance and troubleshooting. SmartSystems Foundation provides a consistent way to manage Intermec devices including mobile computers, RFID readers, printers and bar code scanners, located on-site or remote, to make the most of limited IT resources, and lower the total cost of ownership for Intermec data collection equipment. SmartSystems Foundation can be downloaded at no charge from the Intermec web site. For more information, visit www.intermec.com\SmartSystems. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 45 Chapter 2 Understanding the User Interface and Intermec Applications 46 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 3 Using the Phone You can use the phone feature to make and receive telephone calls, as well as transmit data through cellular wide-area networks (WANs). 47 Chapter 3 Using the Phone About the Phone The 70 Series mobile computer supports two types of cellular technology:

CDMA UMTS Phone features on the computer include a speaker and a microphone. You can also use a Bluetooth headset or hands-free kit. The phone feature is enabled by default on WWAN-equipped mobile computers. After you turn on the phone and activate service with your wireless carrier, you can customize the phone features and network settings. For more information, see the online help on your mobile computer. Activating the UMTS Phone You use a SIM card to activate the UMTS phone on your computer. You can purchase the SIM card from your network provider. To install the SIM card and activate the UMTS radio:

1 Press the Power button to turn off the computer. 2 On the CN70 or CN70e:

a Push the battery release tab forward until the battery releases, and lift the battery away from the computer. b Remove the two Phillips screws and open the card access door. 48 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 3 On the CK70, remove the two screws and lift the card access door away from the computer. Chapter 3 Using the Phone 4 Slide the SIM card door to the left to unlock it and open the door. 5 Slide the SIM card into the slot in the card access door. 6 Close the SIM card door and slide it to the right to lock it in place. 7 Close the card access door and replace the two screws. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 49 Chapter 3 Using the Phone 8 Install the battery. Press down firmly on the bottom of the battery, and make sure that the battery release tab is fully engaged. 9 Press the Power button. The computer cold boots. Activating the CDMA Phone To activate the CDMA radio module in your mobile computer, you need to contact your wireless carrier and set up an account for each mobile computer. The following table lists the carriers that Intermec currently supports. If your carrier is not listed in the table, please contact Intermec product support to see if it is now supported. Currently Supported Carriers Country United States Carriers Sprint, Verizon The carrier will require the Electronic Serial Number (ESN) to start the activation process. You can find the ESN:

on a label located in the upper right corner of the battery compartment. on the outside of the computer shipping box. The activation process is slightly different for each CDMA carrier. Your carrier sales contact and an Intermec representative can guide you through the process. After you supply the ESN to your carrier, they will respond with values that you must enter using the Windows Mobile Activation Wizard (if required). Some of the supported carriers do not require you to enter any values. The following table shows the carriers, the correct activation method to use, and the values that you need to activate your phone. 50 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Values Required for CDMA Phone Chapter 3 Using the Phone Carrier Sprint Verizon Activation Method Activation Wizard Dial *22899 Activation Wizard Activation Values You Need Master Subsidy Lock (MSL) or activation code MDN Mobile Station Identifier (MSID) None. All parameters are automatically transferred wirelessly. After activation, the settings are permanently stored in the CDMA module. Changing the OS or SSPB loads will not affect any of the settings or activation parameters stored in the WAN modem. Starting the Activation Wizard Depending on your wireless carrier, you may need to use the Windows Mobile Activation Wizard to activate your phone. To start the activation wizard:

1 Tap Start > Phone, or tap the Phone button on the Tile bar. The phone application starts. 2 Tap Menu > Activation Wizard. Turning the Phone On and Off Before you can start using your phone, you need to enable it. You can use Wireless Center to enable and disable your phone, as well Bluetooth and Wi-Fi communications. To turn on the phone using Wireless Center:

1 Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Wireless Center. 2 Tap Phone to turn on the Phone 3 (Optional) To configure the phone, tap Menu in the tile bar at the bottom of the screen. 4 Tap OK when you are done configuring the options. 5 Tap OK to close Wireless Center. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 51 Chapter 3 Using the Phone Making a Phone Call After you activate your phone, you are ready to start making phone calls. To make a phone call:

1 Press Phone. 2 Tap the keys to enter the telephone number you want to call, and tap Talk. Making an Emergency Phone Call You can use the UMTS phone to make an emergency phone call even if the SIM card is missing. When the SIM card is not installed, the phone will show that you have no service. However, if you dial certain emergency numbers (such as 112, 911, 000, 08, 118, 119, and 999) the call will go through. 52 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 4 Using the Camera You can use the color camera to take pictures and record videos. 53 Chapter 4 Using the Camera About the Color Camera The camera and flash are located on the back of the computer. You run the Pictures & Videos application to access the camera features. In this application, you can:

take, view, and edit pictures. record and launch video clips stored on the computer or a microSD card. configure camera options. You can also send pictures and video clips to others or save an image as the background on the Home screen. If you download the eMDI application, it uses the camera to capture images. Note: While the Pictures & Videos application is running, you cannot use the imager. Taking a Picture You can take photos in high, normal, or low quality, with image sizes up to 2048 x 1536 pixels. When you take a picture, the image is saved as a .jpg file and stored in the /My Documents/My Pictures folder. To take a picture:

1 Tap Start > Pictures & Videos. 2 Tap the Camera icon in the grid or the Camera button on the Tile bar, or press Enter. 3 Using the screen as a viewfinder, move the camera until you have the image you want to take a picture of. 4 Press Enter to take and save the picture. If you choose to save your pictures to Main memory, they are saved to permanent storage on your mobile computer. 54 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Recording a Video Chapter 4 Using the Camera You need to switch to video mode to record video. When you record video, the video is saved as an .mp4 file and stored in the /My Documents/My Pictures folder. To switch to Video mode and record video:

1 Tap Start > Pictures & Videos. 2 Tap the Camera icon in the grid or the Camera button on the Tile bar, or press Enter. 3 Tap Menu > Video. In the lower right, the camera icon turns into a video camera. On the Tile bar, the Record button replaces the Take Pic button. 4 Using the screen as a viewfinder, move the video camera until you see the scene you want to video record. 5 Press Enter to start recording. 6 When you are done, tap Stop or press Enter to stop recording and save the video. If you choose to save your videos to Main memory, they are saved to permanent storage on the computer. Saving Pictures and Videos to an SD Card Pictures and videos are automatically saved to the main memory on your computer. You can save your pictures and video to an SD card to easily transport them to another device. To save picture and video files to an SD card:

1 Install a microSD card. For help, see Inserting a microSD Card on page 27. 2 Tap Start > Pictures & Videos. 3 Tap the camera icon. 4 Tap Menu > Options. 5 From the Save files to list, select SD card, and tap OK. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 55 Chapter 4 Using the Camera 56 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 5 Using GPS The 70 Series computer comes equipped with an integrated Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver if your computer has phone capability (WWAN radio). The GPS receiver can deliver standards-based National Marine Electronics Association

(NMEA) data strings to GPS applications. 57 Chapter 5 Using GPS About the Integrated GPS on Your Computer Intermec recommends that you use the GPS Intermediate Driver

(GPSID) instead of directly accessing the GPS hardware. The GPSID is a Microsoft software component that interacts between applications and the GPS hardware. As a Microsoft software component, the GPSID:

allows multiple applications to simultaneously access the GPS data stream. provides access to GPS data without requiring applications to recognize and parse NMEA syntax. Using the GPSID Installed on the Computer To use the GPSID installed on your mobile computer, you need to configure the GPSID settings. To configure your GPSID settings:

1 Tap Start > Settings > System > External GPS. The GPS Settings screen appears with Programs selected. 58 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Using GPS 2 Select the COM port that you want your programs to use to get GPS data from your computer. 3 Tap Access in the horizontal scroll bar and select the Manage GPS automatically check box. 4 Tap OK. Improving GPS Performance on the Computer Use the iGPS application to improve the performance of the GPS on your CN70, CN70e, or CK70 computer. The integrated GPS module has three operating modes:

Standalone MS Assisted In Standalone mode, the GPS module relies solely on GPS satellites to determine position. gpsOneXTRA 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 59 Chapter 5 Using GPS In MS Assisted mode, the computer can determine position without receiving GPS signals directly from satellites; instead, the computer receives GPS signals and information provided by the cellular network. Even when the computer can receive a satellite signal, MS Assisted can improve position accuracy and reduce the time to determine initial position (Time-To-First-Fix). Check with your cell phone carrier for availability and pricing for MS Assisted service. Qualcomms gpsOneXTRA Assistance technology provides enhanced operation for Standalone GPS. This option enables the UMTS-enabled computer to automatically download a small assistance data file from the XTRA servers through a brief internet access session. Another option you can configure with iGPS is the fix interval. The fix interval defines how often the GPS should provide new information. Larger intervals use less power, but many applications require small intervals to work correctly. The default for fix interval is 4. Note: Anytime you change the GPS settings, the phone module will reset automatically. It will not affect the functionality of the computer. To improve GPS performance:

1 Go to Start > Settings > System > iGPS. 2 In the Fix Interval tab, enter a value for the fix interval. The default setting is 4 and should be optimized for most applications. 3 Tap the Fix Type tab and select one of these options: Standalone

(1), MS assisted (2), or Enable gpsOneXTRA (check box). 4 Tap OK. 60 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 6 Configuring the Computer Use this chapter to learn about the available methods for configuring your mobile computer and how to use Intermec Settings. You can also use this chapter to learn how to configure network communications and wireless security. 61 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer How to Configure the Computer You can configure many parameters on the computer such as the bar code symbologies it decodes or the network settings. The values you set for these parameters determine how the computer operates. There are several ways to configure the computer:

Directly on the computer. You can use Intermec Settings directly on the computer to change only the settings on that computer. For more information, see Using Intermec Settings on the Computer on page 62. Remotely using Intermec SmartSystems Foundation. When you use SmartSystems, you can remotely configure all of your 70 Series mobile computers as well as other SmartSystems-enabled Intermec computers and peripherals. For more information, see Using Intermec Settings Remotely With SmartSystems Foundation on page 70. You can use a third-party device management product that supports the computer and Intermec Settings, such as Soti MobiControl or Wavelink Avalanche. For more information, visit the Device Management page on the Intermec web site. You can also configure the computer with configuration bundles that you create using SmartSystems Foundation. For more information, see the SmartSystems Foundation online Help. Using Intermec Settings on the Computer Use Intermec Settings to configure parameters for Intermec applications on the computer as well as some device-specific parameters like volume. You can configure parameters for important functions like data collection and communications. 62 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Starting Intermec Settings Intermec Settings is located on the System screen. To start Intermec Settings:

Tap Start > Settings > System > Intermec Settings. The Intermec Settings Main Menu appears. About the Structure of Intermec Settings Use the tables below to help find the parameters in Intermec Settings that you want to configure. Each table contains the parameters for one of the Intermec Settings Main Menu options. If you see > next to a menu option, there are more screens available in the next level. If you see ... next to a menu option, there is only one more screen available. Most parameters are saved as soon as you tap OK. Some settings such as the Serial Port Switch require you to reboot the computer for the changes to take effect. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 63 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Data Collection Menu Data Collection Options Internal Scanner Bluetooth Scanner Dock Tethered Scanner Camera BT-Configure on Connect Magstripe Reader Communications Menu Communications Options Device Name 802.11 Radio Ethernet Adapter Bluetooth Parameters You Can Configure Symbologies Scanner settings Imager settings Decode security Symbologies Scanner settings Imager settings Decode security Symbologies Scanner settings Scanner port settings Imager settings Decode security Symbologies Scanner settings Camera settings Decode security Bluetooth-configure on connect Enable magstripe reader Reader model (read-only) Parameters You Can Configure Device name Security choice (supplicant) Security settings (includes Wi-Fi settings such as enable/disable radio) IP settings Certificates IP settings Bluetooth settings (power, discoverable, connectable, and so on) 64 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Communications Options WWAN Radio Serial Port Switch Device Settings Menu Device Settings Options Date and Time Good Read Volume Backlight Screen Keypad Power Management Compass Settings Sensors USB Connections System Component Versions IDL Runtime Versions Profile Settings Application Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Parameters You Can Configure Add WWAN connection Edit WWAN connections Manage WWAN radio WWAN information Serial port switch settings (IrDA, docking connector, and back interface) Internal scanner Parameters You Can Configure Date and time settings Dock tethered scanner Bluetooth scanner Volume settings (beeper and voice, headset beeper, and vibrate mode) Backlight settings (display backlight, keypad backlight, and light level) Screen rotation Scan button remapping Power button Battery power External power Compass settings (magnetic declination and magnetic inclination) Data streaming Screen rotation Device off USB connections System component versions (read-only) ITC50 (read-only) Whether these parameter options appear in Profile Settings:

Camera Power Scanning 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 65 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Device Settings Options Features Disabled by Policy Parameters You Can Configure None (read-only) Printer Menu Printer Options Printer (if connected through Bluetooth) Parameters You Can Configure Printer settings (Auto detect printer, memory, display, and so on) Note: The Printer menu displays settings for Bluetooth connected printers. The settings that appear in the menu are dependent on the printer that is paired with the device. GPS Menu GPS Options GPS Bread crumbing settings SmartSystems Information Menu SmartSystems Information Options Parameters You Can Configure Identity information (hardware Identity version, firmware version, OS version, and so on) (read-only) Administrator settings (name, phone, and email) Location settings (country, state, city, campus, and detail) Device Notes (read-only) Administrator Information Location Virtual Wedge Menu Virtual Wedge Options Enable Virtual Wedge Bar Code Scanner Wedge Magstripe Reader Wedge Parameters You Can Configure Enable virtual wedge Bar code scanner wedge settings (bar code scanner grid and label encoding) Magstripe Reader Grid 66 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Core Messaging Service Menu Core Messaging Service Options Parameters You Can Configure Server IP Associated Server IP Broadcast Name Port Keep Alive Ping Interval Server IP (read-only) Associated server IP Broadcast name Port (read-only) Keep alive ping interval Device Monitor Menu Device Monitor Options Device Health Controls Parameters You Can Configure Enable health data collection Enable Blue light Set rule file location Set data refresh periods Device Health Screen Captures Device health screen capture settings

(directory and screen capture allowed) None (read-only) Device wipe settings (enable wipe and interval) Disabled Executables Device Wipe License Manager Menu License Manager Options About License Vault Location Services Menu Location Services Options Server Virtual GPS Parameters You Can Configure About settings (read-only) None (displays applications that are licensed) Parameters You Can Configure Server settings (port and enable server) Virtual GPS settings For more information on all parameters in Intermec Settings, see the Intermec Settings Command Reference Manual. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 67 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Navigating in Intermec Settings You can easily navigate through the screens in Intermec Settings to find the parameter you need to configure. To move down a level in Intermec Settings:

Tap the menu item in the list. To move back a level in Intermec Settings:

Tap Back or Cancel on the Tile bar. To save a parameter setting:

Tap OK. To exit Intermec Settings:

Tap Menu > Exit or OK. Configuring Profile Settings With Intermec Settings A profile is a set of predefined values that you can easily apply to the computer to ensure optimal performance in a specific scenario. The end user does not need to figure out the right settings because we have already done that work for you. Profile Settings is available from the Start menu so you can make it available to the end user for easy configuration. Use Intermec Settings to determine the profiles you want the end user to see in the Profile Settings application. To configure the profile information an end user can access:

1 Go to Device Settings > Profile Settings Application. 2 Select Camera, Power, or Scanning. 3 From the Camera, Power, or Scanning submenu, check or clear the Display check box for the settings you want to have available to the end user. 4 Click OK to save your selection. 68 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Restoring Default Settings Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer You can easily restore a menu to its default settings or all of the Intermec Settings parameters to their default settings if necessary. To restore menu defaults:

1 Navigate to the menu that you want to restore to defaults. 2 Tap Menu > Restore Menu Defaults. 3 When prompted, tap Yes to restore the menu default settings. 4 If prompted to refresh the computer, tap Yes. To restore all defaults:

1 Tap Menu > Restore All Defaults. The applications asks if you are sure you want to restore all defaults. 2 Tap Yes. After several minutes, all of the default settings are restored. Hiding Menu Items in Intermec Settings You can hide items in the Intermec Settings menus if you do not want to have them available for other users to access. Hidden items are not saved when you back up your settings in the SmartSystems console. On the mobile computer, you can:

hide menu items by tapping and holding the item, and then choosing Hide Menu Item from the popup list. When asked if you want to hide the menu, tap Yes. restore hidden items in a single menu, by tapping and holding the menu bar where the item was hidden, and then choose Restore Item Default from the popup list. restore all hidden items in all menus, by tapping Menu > Unhide All Items. Note: When you restore default settings in Intermec Settings, only the settings for visible items are restored to defaults. The settings for hidden menu items are not affected. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 69 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Using Intermec Settings Remotely With SmartSystems Foundation Your mobile computer is SmartSystems-enabled, which lets you open Intermec Settings from the SmartSystems console to remotely configure all of your mobile computers. For more information on SmartSystems, see Managing the Computer Using SmartSystems on page 92. To open Intermec Settings from the SmartSystems console:

1 In the SmartSystems console, select a mobile computer and right-click. 2 From the menu, select Intermec Settings. 3 Configure the settings you need to change. As you choose parameters from the tree structure, help for each parameter appears in the upper right pane of Intermec Settings. 4 When you are done making changes, choose File > Save Settings. For help using Intermec Settings, click Help > Contents. For information on all of the parameters in Intermec Settings, see the Intermec Settings Command Reference Manual. About Network Communications 802.11a/b/g/n radio communications. You can easily add the mobile comptuer to your wireless or wired data collection network. You can connect your computer using:

Ethernet communications. Bluetooth communications. USB and serial communications. Configuring 802.11a/b/g/n (Wi-Fi) Radio Communications Make sure all components with antennas are at least 30 cm (1 ft) apart when power is applied. Failure to comply could result in equipment damage. 70 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer The mobile computer contains an 802.11 radio to transfer data using wireless communications and to support the TCP/IP network protocols. This section of the manual assumes that your wireless network is set up, including your access points. By default, the 802.11 radio is disabled. Use the following procedure to enable the Wi-Fi radio using Intermec Settings. If you would like to use ScanNGo bar codes to easily enable the radio and set the default security settings, see Appendix C ScanNGo Wi-Fi Configuration Bar Codes on page 163. To enable the Wi-Fi radio on your computer and configure communications:

1 Tap Start > Settings > System > Intermec Settings. 2 From the Intermec Settings main menu, tap Communications >

802.11 Radio > Radio Enabled. 3 Select the Radio Enabled check box and tap OK. By default, the computer uses Funk security and enables DHCP. 4 Use Intermec Settings to configure any other parameters you need to use for communication with your network. 5 Configure 802.11 security. For help, see About Wireless Security on page 79. Configuring Ethernet Communications To configure Ethernet communications, connect your mobile computer to your Ethernet network using the Ethernet Snap-On Adapter (Model 1000AA01) or an Ethernet dock. To configure Ethernet communications:

1 Connect the Ethernet snap-on adapter to your mobile computer. 2 Connect the Ethernet cable from your network to the snap-on adapter or dock. Ethernet communications are automatically enabled on your mobile computer. 3 Make sure that your computer is communicating with the network.

) should appear on the title bar. The network connection icon (

70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 71 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Configuring Bluetooth Communications Your mobile computer is Bluetooth-enabled, which lets you connect to other Bluetooth devices, such as scanners, printers, or audio devices. You need to turn on the Bluetooth radio before you can discover and connect to other Bluetooth devices. By default, the radio is turned off. To turn on the Bluetooth radio and configure Bluetooth settings:

1 Tap Start > Settings > Bluetooth > Mode. 2 Select the Turn on Bluetooth check box. 3 (Optional) If you want your computer to be visible to other Bluetooth devices, choose Make this device visible to other devices. 4 Tap OK. The Bluetooth radio maintains its state through a reboot or cold boot and maintains virtual COM ports. But, if you clean boot your computer you need to recreate pairings to devices. Connecting to a Bluetooth Scanner You can connect the computer to an Intermec Bluetooth scanner, such as the SF51 or SR61. 72 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer To connect to an Intermec Bluetooth scanner:

1 Tap Start > Settings > System > Wireless Scanning. 2 Tap Add Device. 3 Select Quick Connect, Search, or Manual. Follow the onscreen instruction to add a wireless scanner. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 73 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Connecting to a Bluetooth Printer To configure your computer for Bluetooth wireless printing, you need to:

create an application that opens the wireless printing COM port on your computer. For help, see the Bluetooth Resource Kit, which is part of the Intermec Developer Library (IDL), available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com/idl. select the current wireless printer on your computer. For help, see the next procedure. Note: You can also print wirelessly using Microsoft APIs with Bluetooth extensions for Winsock and Bluetooth virtual COM ports. For help, see the Bluetooth Resource Kit documentation. To select the current wireless printer:

1 Tap Start > Settings > System > Wireless Printing. 2 Tap Search to find a printer, or tap Manual to enter a device address. Follow the onscreen instructions to select the current wireless printer. 3 (Optional) Tap Print Test Page. The printer prints out a test page. 74 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Connecting to a Bluetooth Audio Device Use the Bluetooth Audio enabler to discover, activate, and connect to Bluetooth audio devices such as a headset. This enables system sounds to be monitored through the headset. To connect to a Bluetooth audio device:

1 Tap Start > Settings > System > Bluetooth Audio. 2 Tap Search to find your Bluetooth headset or hands-free device. 3 Select your device from the list and configure any settings. 4 Click OK when you are done. About Serial and USB Communications You can use these 70 Series accessories to transmit data to and receive data from another device through serial or USB communications:

RS-232 Snap-On Adapter (Model 1000AA03) USB Snap-On Adapter (Model 1000AA07) For more information about these accessories and how to order them, see 70 Series Accessories on page 7. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 75 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Connecting to a Tethered Scanner Use this procedure to connect your mobile computer to an SR30, SR61T, or ASCII tethered scanner and enable RS-232 communications. To connect the computer to a tethered scanner:

1 Tap Start > Settings > System > Intermec Settings >

Communication s > Serial Port Switch. 2 Select Standard docking and IrDA and tap OK. 3 Tap Back to return to the Main Menu. 4 Tap Data Collection > Dock Tethered Scanner > Enable scanner auto-detect. 5 Select the Enable scanner auto-detect check box and tap OK. 6 Perform one of these items based on the type of scanner you are connecting:

For an SR30 or SR61T scanner, tap Scanner Settings, select SR Intermec Scanner, and then tap OK. For an ASCII scanner, tap Scanner Settings, select ASCII, and then tap OK. Set up the appropriate COM port settings by selecting Scanner Port Settings. 7 Connect the RS-232 snap-on adapter with the attached scanner to the bottom of the mobile computer. Creating an ISP Connection You can create an Internet Service Provider (ISP) connection to send and receive e-mail messages using Messaging (Outlook E-mail) and view web pages using Internet Explorer Mobile. You need to get your ISP dial-up access telephone number, a user name, and a password from your ISP. To create an ISP Connection:

1 Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections. 2 Under My ISP, tap Add a new modem connection. 3 Enter a name for the connection, such as ISP Connection. 76 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 4 If you are using an external modem connected to your mobile computer with a cable, select Hayes Compatible on COM1 from the Select a modem list. 5 Tap Next. 6 Enter the access phone number and then tap Next. 7 Enter the User name, Password, and Domain (if provided by an ISP or your network administrator). 8 Tap Finish. 9 On the Connections screen, tap Advanced on the horizontal scroll. 10 Tap Dialing Rules. 11 When the Enable Dialing Rules box appears, tap OK. 12 Tap Edit. 13 In the Name field, enter your phone type (Home, Mobile, or Work). 14 Tap OK until you exit the Connections screen. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 77 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer Creating a VPN Server Connection You can create a Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection to securely connect to servers, such as a corporate network, through the Internet. Before you can create a VPN connection, you need this information from your network administrator:

User name Password Domain name TCP/IP settings Host name or IP address of the VPN server To create a VPN server connection:

1 Tap Start > Settings > Connections > Connections. 2 Under My Work Network, tap Add a new VPN server connection. 3 Step through the screens to set up your VPN connection. 78 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual About Wireless Security Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer The computer provides four types of security for your wireless network:

Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 (WPA2) Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) 802.1x WEP This section explains how to configure wireless security on your mobile computer. Intermec recommends that you implement WPA2 security using PSK (Personal) or 802.1X (Enterprise) key management as appropriate. You must use either Funk or Microsoft security to implement your security solution. For details, see the next section, Choosing Between Microsoft and Funk Security. If you are using WPA-802.1x, WPA2-802.1x, or 802.1x security, this section also assumes that your authentication server and authenticators are properly configured. Note: Your security choice does not depend on your authentication server. For example, you can choose Funk security if you use Microsoft Active Directory to issue certificates. Choosing Between Microsoft and Funk Security The computer supports both Funk and Microsoft security, which dynamically select wireless networks based on your preferences. The option you choose depends on your network security needs. If you are using the computer in a static environment that requires a high level of security, you should use Funk security, which offers CCX v4.0 compliance, support for LEAP and TTLS, and configuration for up to four profiles. To use Funk security, you need to select a profile. For help, see the next section, Selecting a Funk Security Profile. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 79 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer If you are primarily using the computer to connect to Wi-Fi hotspots, you may want to use Microsoft security. To use Microsoft security, you need to select it as your security choice. For help, see Selecting Microsoft as Your Security Choice on page 84. Selecting a Funk Security Profile You can define up to four profiles for Funk security. Different profiles let your computer communicate in different networks without having to change all of your security settings. For example, you may want to set up one profile for the manufacturing floor and one for the warehouse. By default, the active profile is Profile 1. Selecting a Funk Security Profile Use the following procedure to select a Funk security profile. 1 Start Intermec Settings. 2 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security. 3 Choose a profile. A list of configurable settings appears. 4 (Optional) In the Profile Label text box, enter a meaningful name for your profile. 5 Configure your security settings. For help, see the next sections. 6 Repeat Steps 3 through 5 for each profile you want to define. 7 Set an active profile by choosing it in the Active Profile list. 8 Save your settings. Configuring WPA or WPA2 Enterprise (802.1x) Security With Funk Use these procedures to set WPA-802.1x or WPA2-802.1x security on your comptuer with Funk security. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your 70 Series are configured. 2 Make sure Funk is selected as your security choice. 3 Start Intermec Settings. 80 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 4 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security. 5 Select the profile you want to configure. 6 For Association, choose WPA or WPA2. Encryption automatically defaults to TKIP or AES, respectively. 7 For 8021x, choose TTLS, PEAP, EAP-FAST, or TLS. 8 If you choose TTLS, EAP-FAST, or PEAP:

a For Prompt for Credentials, choose Enter credentials now. b Enter a User Name and User Password. c For Validate Server Certificate, choose Yes. Note: The correct date must be set on your computer when you enable Validate Server Certificate. 9 If you choose TLS:

a Load a user and root certificate on your computer. For help, see Loading a Certificate on page 88. b Enter a User Name and Subject Name. c For Validate Server Certificate, choose Yes. Configuring WPA or WPA2 Personal (PSK) Security With Funk Use the following procedure to configure WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK with Funk security. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your computer are configured. 2 Make sure Funk is selected as your security choice. 3 Start Intermec Settings. 4 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security. 5 Select the profile you want to configure. 6 For Association, choose WPA or WPA2. 7 For 8021x, choose None. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 81 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 8 For Pre-Shared Key, enter the pre-shared key or passphrase. The pre-shared key must be a value of 32 hex pairs preceded by 0x for a total of 66 characters. The value must match the key value on the access point. The passphrase must be from 8 to 63 characters. After you enter a passphrase, the 70 Series internally converts it to a pre-shared key. This value must match the passphrase on the authenticator. 9 Save your settings. Configuring 802.1x Security With Funk Security Use the following procedure to configure 802.1x-WEP security with Funk security. Intermec recommends that you use WPA2-802.1x instead of 802.1x-WEP if possible. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your computer are configured. 2 Make sure Funk is selected as your security choice. 3 Start Intermec Settings. 4 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security. 5 Select the profile you want to configure. 6 For Association, choose Open. 7 For Encryption, choose WEP. 8 For 8021x, choose TTLS, PEAP, or TLS. 9 If you chose TTLS or PEAP:

a Enter a User Name. b For Prompt for Credentials, choose Enter credentials now. c Enter a User Password. d For Validate Server Certificate, choose Yes. 10 If you choose TLS:

a Load a user and root certificate on your computer. For help, see Loading a Certificate on page 88. b For Validate Server Certificate, choose Yes. 82 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer c Enter a User Name and Subject Name. 11 Save your settings. Configuring Static WEP Security With Funk Security Use the following procedure to configure static WEP security with Funk. Intermec recommends that you use WPA2-PSK instead of WEP if possible. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your computer are configured. 2 Make sure Funk is selected as your security choice. 3 Start Intermec Settings. 4 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security. 5 Select the profile you want to configure. 6 For Association, choose Open. 7 For Encryption, choose WEP. 8 For 8021x choose None. 9 Define a value for the keys you want to use. You can define up to four keys (Key 1 through Key 4). Enter an ASCII key or a hex key that is either 5 bytes or 13 bytes long depending on the capability of the radio. Set a 5- byte value for 64-bit WEP or a 13-byte value for 128-bit WEP. Hex keys must be preceded by 0x and contain 5 or 13 hex pairs. 10 For Transmit key, choose the key you want to use for transmitting data. 11 Save your settings. Using Open (No Security) Associations with Funk Use the following procedure to configure your mobile computer for open security using Funk. 1 Start Intermec Settings. 2 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security. 3 Select the active profile you are using. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 83 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 4 For Association, choose Open. 5 For Encryption, choose None. 6 Tap OK. Your settings are saved. Selecting Microsoft as Your Security Choice The default security setting is Funk. If you want to use Microsoft Wireless Zero Configuration (WZC) security, you need to select it as your security choice. After you select Microsoft as your security choice, you will be prompted to save your settings and reset the computer for your change to take effect. With Microsoft as your security choice, you can configure:

WPA 802.1x Static WEP Selecting Microsoft Security Use the following procedure to select Microsoft security. 1 Start Intermec Settings. For help, see Configuring the Computer on page 61. 2 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Security Choice. 3 From the Security Choice list, select Microsoft Security. An alert box appears telling you that you must save your settings and reboot the computer for the new security choice to take effect. 4 Choose Yes. The computer resets and starts with Microsoft Security as the Security Choice. Configuring WPA or WPA2 Enterprise (802.1x) Security With Microsoft Use these procedures to set WPA-802.1x security on your computer with Microsoft security. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your computer are configured. 2 Start Intermec Settings. 84 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 3 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 4 For Infrastructure Mode, choose Infrastructure. 5 For Network Authentication, choose WPA or WPA2. Data Encryption automatically defaults to TKIP. 6 For 802.1x Authentication, choose either TLS, or PEAP. 7 If you choose TLS:

a Choose Properties > Run App. The Auth. Settings dialog box appears. b Choose Select. c Select your certificate from the list and press Enter. The User Logon dialog box appears. d Enter a User Name and Domain and press Enter. 8 If you choose PEAP:

a Choose Properties > Run App. The Auth. Settings box appears. b Choose Validate Server and press Enter. When the radio starts to authenticate, the Network Password dialog box appears. c Enter a User Name and Password and select Save Password. d (Optional) In the Domain field, enter the Active Directory domain associated with the user account. 9 Save your settings. Enabling WPA or WPA2 Personal (PSK) Security With Microsoft Use the following procedure to enable WPA-PSK With Microsoft Security. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your computer are configured. 2 Start Intermec Settings. 3 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 4 For Infrastructure Mode, choose Infrastructure. 5 For Network Authentication, choose WPA-PSK. Data Encryption automatically defaults to TKIP. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 85 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 6 For Pre-Shared Key, enter the pre-shared key or the passphrase. The pre-shared key must be a value of 32 hex pairs preceded by 0x for a total of 66 characters. The value must match the key value on the authenticator. The passphrase must be from 8 to 63 characters. After you enter a passphrase, the computer internally converts it to a pre-shared key. 7 Save your settings. Configuring 802.1x Security with Microsoft Use the following procedure to configure 802.1x security with Microsoft security. Intermec recommends that you use WPA2-802.1x instead of 802.1x-WEP if possible. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your computer are configured. 2 Start Intermec Settings. 3 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 4 For Infrastructure Mode, choose Infrastructure. 5 For Network Authentication, choose Open. 6 For Data Encryption, choose WEP. 7 For 802.1X Authentication, choose TLS or PEAP. 8 If you choose TLS:

a Choose Properties > Run App. The Auth. Settings box appears. b Choose Select. c Select your certificate from the list and press Enter. The User Logon dialog box appears. d Enter a User Name and a Domain. 9 If you choose PEAP:

a Choose Properties > Run App. The Auth. Settings box appears. b Select Validate Server and press Enter. When the radio starts to authenticate, the Network Password dialog box appears. c Enter a User Name and Password and select Save Password. d (Optional) In the Domain field, enter the domain. 86 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer e Press Enter. 10 For Network Key Setting, choose Automatic. 11 Save your settings. Configuring Static WEP Security With Microsoft Use the following procedure to configure static WEP security with Microsoft security. Intermec recommends that you use WPA2-PSK instead of WEP if possible. 1 Make sure the communications and radio parameters on your computer are configured. 2 Start Intermec Settings. 3 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 4 For Network Authentication, choose Open. 5 For Data Encryption, choose WEP. 6 For Network Key Setting, choose Enter Key and Index. 7 For Network Key Value, enter an ASCII key or a hex key that is either 5 bytes or 13 bytes long depending on the capability of the radio. Set a 5-byte value for 64-bit WEP or a 13-byte value for 128-bit WEP. Hex keys must be preceded by 0x and contain 5 or 13 hex pairs. 8 For Network Key Index, select the key you want to use for data transmission. 9 Save your settings. Using Open (No Security) Associations With Microsoft Use the following procedure to configure your mobile computer for open security using Microsoft WZC. 1 Start Intermec Settings. 2 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 3 For Network Authentication, choose Open. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 87 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 4 For Data Encryption, choose Disabled. 5 Tap OK. Your settings are saved. Loading a Certificate To use transport layer security (TLS) with WPA or 802.1x security, you need a unique client certificate on the computer and a trusted root certificate authority (CA) certificate. Certificates are pieces of cryptographic data that guarantee a public key is associated with a private key. They contain a public key and the entity name that owns the key. Each certificate is issued by a certificate authority. To import a certificate chain:

1 Start Intermec Settings. 2 Go to Start > Settings > System > Intermec Settings. 3 Tap Communications > 802.11 Radio > Certificates. The Certificates screen appears. 4 To import a certificate chain:

a Tap Import Certificates to install the selected certificate. b In the CertImportUI screen, tap the <<< button next to the Select pfx to import text field. 88 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer c Select the root certificate from the list. d Tap Import Certificate. 5 To import user and root certificates from a Microsoft IAS server:

a Tap Import Certificates. b Tap Web Enrollment. c Enter the User, Password, and Server (IP address) to log into the server. d Tap OK. A dialog box appears asking if you want to load the root certificate. e Tap OK. The Enrollment Tool message box appears telling you that the certificate has been added. f Tap OK to close the message box. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 89 Chapter 6 Configuring the Computer 90 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 7 Managing the Computer Use this chapter to learn how to remotely update, configure, and monitor your Intermec mobile computers. You will also find information on installing and developing software applications as well as how to upgrade the system software. 91 Chapter 7 Managing the Computer Managing the Computer in Your Network When you have multiple mobile computers and peripherals in your network, it is essential to have an easy way to manage updates, configure all of the devices, and remotely troubleshoot problems. Intermec provides a free device management software platform called SmartSystems Foundation to help you manage your devices. You can also purchase third-party device management software through a vendor. Managing the Computer Using SmartSystems Intermec's SmartSystems Foundation is a software platform that lets you manage all of your SmartSystems-enabled devices simultaneously from a central server. The SmartSystems Foundation console displays all SmartSystems-enabled computers and peripherals in your network. Intermec SmartSystems Foundation Console Through the Console, you can:

drag-and-drop configuration bundles, operating system updates, and firmware upgrades to multiple computers. 92 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Managing the Computer save configuration settings from a single device and deploy those settings to many devices simultaneously. remotely change settings on SmartSystems-enabled computers and peripherals. The SmartSystems Foundation console can report on asset locations and battery status, making it easier to manage your mobile devices. With a Provisioning license, SmartSystems Foundation can automatically push software, configuration settings, and other files to connected mobile computers. The license also enables ScanNGo, which makes connecting additional mobile computers to your wireless network as easy as reading bar codes. You can download SmartSystems Foundation from the Intermec web site at no charge. For more information, visit www.intermec.com\SmartSystems. To purchase a Provisioning license, contact your local Intermec sales representative. Managing the Computer Using Third-Party Software You can use third-party software such as Wavelink Avalanche to centrally manage your Intermec devices. Device management software enables you to update software, increase security, track your assets, and troubleshoot devices remotely. You can download the Wavelink Enabler for the mobile computer from the Wavelink web site. For more information, visit the Intermec web site and search for Wavelink Avalanche or visit www.wavelink.com to download the enabler. Developing and Installing Applications Use the Intermec Resource Kits to develop applications to run on the mobile computer. The Resource Kits are a library of C++, .NET, Java, and web components grouped by functionality that you can use to create applications for the computer. The Resource Kits are part of the Intermec Developer Library (IDL), and can be downloaded from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com/idl. For more information, see the Intermec Developer Library Resource Kit Developers Guide. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 93 Chapter 7 Managing the Computer Packaging Your Application For very simple applications, the executable file may be the only file you need to deploy. More typically, you will have a set of files to install. Intermec recommends using .cab files to install your applications. The computer uses standard Windows Mobile .cab files and will install third-party .cab files. Choosing a Target Location You can have your .cab file place your application in any of these memory locations on the mobile computer:

The ObjectStore. The optional microSD card. Depending on available disk space, you may want to consider installing your application files on the microSD card. Using a card creates the Storage Card folder on the computer. The non-volatile Flash File Store. Applications and data in the Flash File Store will persist through a clean boot. Note: The Flash File Store is erased if you reflash the operating system image. Files copied to any of these locations are safe when you cold boot the computer as long as the AutoRun system is installed in the appropriate location. When AutoRun is installed on the computer, all .cab files in the CabFiles folder are automatically extracted after a cold boot. For more information about AutoRun, see the Intermec Developer Library Resource Kit Developers Guide. Installing Applications Using SmartSystems Foundation Console You can use the SmartSystems console to drag-and-drop Intermec applications onto your mobile computer. The console is part of SmartSystems Foundation. To install applications using SmartSystems Foundation Console:

1 Download your application file from the Intermec web site and unzip it on your desktop PC. 94 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Managing the Computer 2 Double-click the application file to install it. The application file should appear in the Software Vault. 3 From the SmartSystems console in the Software Vault, drag-and-drop the application onto each mobile computer in your network, or drop the application on a group of computers contained in a folder. Installing Applications Using Microsoft ActiveSync When you only have a few computers to update with applications, you can copy files using Microsoft ActiveSync. This procedure assumes that Microsoft ActiveSync is installed on your PC and is up and running. 1 Connect to the mobile computer via ActiveSync. 2 Copy the .cab files from your development PC to the computer. 3 Reboot or cold boot the computer. 4 After the boot process is finished, browse to the .cab files and tap the files to install them. Installing Applications Using a Storage Card Use a storage card to install applications on one computer at a time or if you have no network connection. To install applications using a storage card:

1 Copy your application file to the storage card. 2 Install the storage card in the mobile computer. 3 On the mobile computer, browse to the Storage Card folder and run your application. Launching Applications Automatically There are two ways to launch an application automatically on a cold boot:

Set up your .cab file to place a shortcut to the application in the

\Windows\StartUp directory at install time. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 95 Chapter 7 Managing the Computer Use AutoRun.exe to start your application at boot time. AutoRun ships on the computer and automates other operations. At boot time, AutoRun executes any commands found in its data file, AutoRun.dat. Follow the next procedure to create this data file for your mobile computer. For more information on AutoRun, see the Intermec Developer Library Resource Kit Developers Guide. To configure AutoRun:

1 In Notepad, create a file called AutoUser.dat. 2 Write this command in the file:

RUN Path\AppName.exe arg1, arg2, arg3 where:

Path is the path to the directory where the application resides. AppName.exe is the application name. arg1, arg2, and arg3 are optional command line arguments. For example, to launch MyProgram.exe located in the Flash File Store, the command is:

EXEC Flash File Store\Apps\MyProgram.exe Because AutoRun handles quoted file names for the first parameter, you can specify path names or file names containing white spaces. AutoRun only supports one set of quotes per command. 3 Copy AutoUser.dat to the \Windows\Startup directory on the mobile computer. Updating the System Software The mobile computer uses Image Update to update the operating system (OS) and the system software. Image Update uses incremental packages to allow for smaller and faster updates because the contents are stored in flash ROM. 96 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 7 Managing the Computer Update packages persist through a cold or clean boot and cannot be removed by the end user. The Image Update process also provides strengthened security because all packages are signed. Image Update packages (.pkg or .pks files) may contain elements such as .dll, executable (.exe), and .cab files. You can use either of these methods to update your mobile computer:

You can update multiple computers at the same time using the SmartSystems Console. For help, see the next section, Updating Multiple Computers Using SmartSystems Console. You can update individual computers by transferring the packages to the mobile computer and then installing them from the mobile computer. If you are using SmartSystems Foundation to update the computer, you can purchase a Provisioning License to send the Image Update silently. For more information, see Sending the Image Updates Silently on page 98. Updating Multiple Computers Using SmartSystems Console You can use the SmartSystems console to update the operating system or system software on your mobile computer. The console is part of SmartSystems Foundation and is available from the Intermec web site through the Intermec Developer Library (IDL). Before you can update your mobile computer, you need:

SmartSystems Foundation. To download SmartSystems Foundation, go to www.intermec.com/idl and open the Device Management page. the SmartSystems bundles you want to install. The SmartSystems bundle contains the Image Update package file. These SmartSystems bundles are available from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. Go to Support > Downloads. a Provisioning license. To update the mobile computer using SmartSystems Foundation:

1 Open the SmartSystems console. 2 Make sure the SmartSystems console and the mobile computer are on the same subnet and they are connected wirelessly or through Ethernet. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 97 Chapter 7 Managing the Computer 3 Make sure the mobile computer is in a powered dock or that power management is disabled. 4 Download the SmartSystems bundle to your PC. 5 Double-click the SmartSystems bundle on your PC to extract the update files to the software vault. 6 From the SmartSystems console, locate the bundles to install and drag them to each mobile computer (or group in a folder) you want to update. The SmartSystems console installs the update on your mobile computers. After the download is complete, your mobile computer begins the update process and automatically performs a cold boot. The computer then boots into a special Update Loader mode where the computer has no network connections and is completely unusable. This process can take anywhere from 30 seconds to 15 minutes depending on the update. After the update is complete, the computer boots again. 7 When a confirmation dialog box appears requesting user input, dismiss it. Note: The SmartSystems console indicates that your mobile computer is offline, by displaying a red stop symbol, until the computer reboots and reconnects to the system. Sending the Image Updates Silently If you want to automatically download and send update packages to your mobile computers, you can purchase a Provisioning license. The silent updates do not require any user intervention and begin when you choose to have the update process start. SmartSystem Foundation users are notified when update packages are released so that they can download them and update their Intermec computers. For more information, see the SmartSystems Foundation Help. 98 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Updating Individual Mobile Computers Chapter 7 Managing the Computer You can download update packages from your PC to the mobile computer using Microsoft ActiveSync or any other file transfer method you choose. If you need to download ActiveSync or the Windows Mobile Device Center, go to www.windowsmobile.com/getstarted. To update an individual mobile computer:

1 Download the Image Update packages you want to install from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. Go to Support >

Downloads. 2 Transfer the Image Update package from your PC to the mobile computer. 3 On your mobile computer, tap Start > Programs > File Explorer and navigate to the location of the Image Update package. 4 Double-tap the package to start the installation. Your mobile computer begins the update process and automatically performs a cold boot. The computer then boots into a special Update Loader mode where the computer has no network connections and is completely unusable. This process can take anywhere from 30 seconds to 15 minutes depending on the update. After the update is complete, the mobile computer boots again. 5 When a confirmation dialog box appears requesting user input, dismiss it. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 99 Chapter 7 Managing the Computer 100 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer If you encounter any problems while using the 70 Series computer, look in this chapter to find a possible solution. You will also find information on routine maintenance. 101 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer About the Intermec Dashboard The Intermec Dashboard is designed to provide proactive monitoring of your mobile computers to prevent downtime. You can easily see the health of the device and can help pinpoint the source of a problem to determine if it is hardware or software related. Intermec Dashboard displays information such as the status of network connections, battery usage, storage space, and internal devices. It also provides system information such as the operating system, firmware, and hardware configuration. To launch the Intermec Dashboard:

Press the Intermec Dashboard button (m) on the computer keypad. Intermec Dashboard Main Screen Intermec Dashboard is highly integrated with SmartSystems Foundation. You can use SmartSystems Foundation to remotely monitor the health of your computers. For more information, refer to the SmartSystems online help. 102 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Troubleshooting Your Mobile Computer Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Use the troubleshooting tables in this section to fix problems with the Wi-Fi connection, 802.1x security, the imager, or general problems with operating the mobile computer. If you send the computer in for service, it is your responsibility to save the computer data and configuration. Intermec is responsible only for ensuring that the hardware matches the original configuration when repairing or replacing the computer. Troubleshooting the Wi-Fi Connection Use this troubleshooting table to help solve problems with your 802.11 radio connection. Problems With the Wi-Fi Connection Problem When you turn on the computer after it was suspended for a while (10 to 15 minutes or longer), it can no longer send or receive messages over the network. The computer is connected to the network and you move to a new site to collect data. Your computer now shows you are not connected to the network. The computer appears to be connected to the network, but you cannot establish a terminal emulation session with the host computer. The computer appears to be connected to the network, but the host computer is not receiving any information from the 70 Series computer. Solution Host may have deactivated or lost current terminal emulation session. In a TCP/IP direct connect network, turn off the Keep Alive message from host to maintain the TCP session while the computer is suspended. Move closer to an access point or to a different location to reestablish communications until you reconnect with the network. There may be a problem with the host computer, or with the connection between the access point and the host computer. Check with the network administrator to make sure the host is running and allowing users to log in to the system. There may be a problem with the connection between the access point and the host computer. Check with the network administrator or use your access point users manual. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 103 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Problem A network connection icon appears in the toolbar, but then disappears. Solution The computer may not be communicating with the intended access point. Make sure the network name matches the access point network name. Default network name is INTERMEC. The access point may not be communicating with the server. Ensure the access point is turned on, properly configured, and has 802.1x security enabled. Troubleshooting 802.1x Security Use the following table to troubleshoot problems with your 802.1x security that will prevent you from connecting to your network, such as a missing WEP key value or an incorrect password. Problems With 802.1x Security Problem The computer indicates it is not authenticated. Solution Make sure that:

the User Name and Password parameters on the computer must match the user name and password on authentication server. You may need to reenter the password on both the computer and authentication server. on your authentication server, the user and group are allowed and the group policy is allowed to log into the server. For help, see the documentation that shipped with your authentication server software. the IP address and secret key for access point must match the IP address and secret key on the authentication server. You may need to reenter the IP address and secret key on both your access point and authentication server. the authentication server software is running on the server PC. You receive a message saying The server certificate has expired or your system date is incorrect after you perform a clean boot on the computer. Date and time are not saved when you perform a clean boot. Reenter the date and time, and then save your changes. 104 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Checking 802.11 Network Status Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer If you have trouble connecting to your 802.11 wireless network:

Make sure you have correctly set network parameters on the computer. Check your wireless security settings. Follow the next procedure to verify available access points and networks, check signal strength, and view other diagnostics. If you need to contact Intermec Product Support, this information can be helpful in troubleshooting wireless network connection issues. To verify the network status:

1 Tap Start > iSpyWiFi. The ISpyWiFi application launches. The ISpyWiFi tab shows:

MAC address and IP address of the 802.11 radio. network association status, including the SSID and MAC address of the access point. security configuration. radio transmit power and signal strength information. 2 Tap the Scan tab to view a list of available 802.11 networks. The list includes the signal strength, channel, and MAC address for each network. Tap Scan to refresh the screen. 3 Tap the Supp tab to view radio supplicant information, including a list of supplicant events and authentication status. To verify the settings for the currently active security profile, tap Configure Profile. Intermec Settings launches for you to configure 802.11 Radio settings. To try reconnecting to the network, tap Reconnect. To delete the events in the list, tap Clear Events. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 105 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer 4 Tap the Ping tab to run a ping test to the host. To run a ping test:

a In the Host field, enter the IP address of the host. b From the Repetitions list, choose the number of times the computer will ping the host. c Tap Ping. The graph shows the amount of time it takes for the host to return the ping. Tap List to see this information in a list format. 5 Tap the RSSI tab to view the received signal strength of the host signal. The information box includes the current signal strength, host SSID name, MAC address, data rate, and transmit power. Tap Mark to place an arrow marker above the graph. 6 Tap the Conf tab to set up a log file that lists RSSI history. This screen includes the 802.11 radio driver version and available radio modes. To create a log file:

a Check the Log to File check box. b (Optional) Change the sample period and number of samples displayed. c Tap Log File. The Save As screen appears. d (Optional) Change the name of the saved log file, the folder to which the file will be saved, the content type (log or text), and the location. e Tap OK. 106 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Troubleshooting Reading Bar Codes Use this section to troubleshoot problems that may prevent you from being able to read a bar code such as the symbology not be enabled. Problems Reading Bar Codes Problem You cannot see the illumination beam or frame from the imager when you press the Scan button and aim the imager at a bar code label. When you release a Scan button or handle trigger, the Good Read light does not turn off. The scanner will not read the bar code label. Solution You may be too far away from the bar code label. Try moving closer to the bar code label and scan it again. You may be reading the bar code label straight on. Change the reading angle and try again. The imager hardware trigger might be disabled in Intermec Settings. To check the setting go to Start > Settings >

Systems > Data Collection > Scanner Settings. Hardware trigger should be checked. The Good Read light will remain on if you configure the computer to use continuous/edge triggering. If you configure the computer for level triggering and the Good Read light remains on, there may be a problem. Press one of the Scan buttons or pull the trigger again without scanning a bar code label. If the light is still on, contact your local Intermec representative. Aim the scanner beam to cross entire bar code label in one pass. Vary the scanning angle. Check the quality of the bar code label, Scan a bar code label that you know will scan. Compare the two bar code labels to see if the bar code quality is too low. You may need to replace the label that you cannot scan. Make sure the bar code symbology is enabled and configured correctly. Use Intermec Settings to check the symbologies. Expand Data Collection > Symbologies beneath devices listed (scanner, virtual wedge) to check and enable symbologies, then scan the bar code label again. Make sure the computer application is expecting input from a bar code. You may need to type this information instead. The scanner does not read the bar code labels quickly, or the scanning beam seems to be faint or obscured. The scanner window may be dirty. Clean the window with a solution of ammonia and water. Wipe dry. Do not allow abrasive material to touch the window. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 107 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Solution The computer may have decoded the bar code label in a symbology other than the labels actual symbology. Try scanning the bar code label again. Make sure you scan the entire label. Problem You scan a valid bar code label to enter data for your application. The data decoded by the scan module does not match the data encoded in the bar code label. The input device attached to the computer does not work well or read bar code labels very quickly. Troubleshooting Operating the Computer Set the Scanner Model command to the specific attached input device. Check enabled bar code symbologies and enable only the symbologies being used. Use this section to troubleshoot problems that may prevent you from being able to operate the computer. Problems Operating the Computer Problem You press the Power button and nothing happens. The computer appears to be locked up and you cannot enter data. Solution Try the following solutions:

Replace or charge the battery. The battery may be completely drained. Remove the battery and press the Reset button to perform a cold boot. For help, seeCold Booting the Computer on page 110. Press the Power button and select Suspend from the Power Options menu. Press the Power button to turn the screen back on. Press the Power button and select Reboot from the Power Options menu. Remove the battery and press the Reset button to perform a cold boot. For help, seeCold Booting the Computer on page 110. Try reloading the firmware. For help, see Updating the System Software on page 96. If the computer does not boot or reset, contact your Intermec representative for help. You tap the screen and nothing happens. You cannot type a character on the keypad or you can only type uppercase or lowercase letters. Align your screen. For help, see Aligning the Screen on page 41. You may have locked a modifier key on the keypad. Press the necessary key sequence to unlock the key. For help, see About the Keypad on page 15. 108 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Calling Product Support Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer If you cannot find the answer to your problem in the Troubleshooting the Computer section, you can visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support. If you still need help after visiting Knowledge Central, you may need to call Product Support. To talk to an Intermec Product Support representative, call:

1-800-755-5505 Before you can call Intermec Product Support, make sure you have the following information ready:

Configuration number Serial number Operating system version SmartSystems Platform Bundle (SSPB) version If you are using security, know the type (Funk or Microsoft) and the full set of parameters Power management settings If you are using Intermec terminal emulation (ITE), know the version and protocol. If you are not using ITE, know the language your custom application was written in and the tools you used to create it. You can find most of the information listed above in Intermec Settings. Consult your application developer for information on your custom application. Finding Your Configuration Number Use the following procedure to help you find the configuration number of your computer. Look at the label on the back of the computer. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 109 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Finding Your Operating System Version Use the following procedure to find the OS version of your mobile computer. 1 Press the Intermec Dashboard (m) button to launch the Dashboard. 2 Tap the Information bar. The Information Details page appears and displays information such as the firmware version and the OS version. Resetting the Computer If the computer does not resume after pressing the Power button, or if the computer or an application locks up, you may need to reset the computer. The computer uses the configuration currently saved in flash memory during the boot process. There are three ways to reset the computer:

Reboot Cold boot Clean boot Rebooting the Computer You may need to reboot the computer to correct conditions where an application stops responding to the system. To reboot the computer:

Press the Power button and select Reboot from the menu. The computer systematically shuts down, restarts, and goes through the initialization process. Cold Booting the Computer In some cases where the computer completely stops responding, it may be necessary to perform a cold boot or hard reset. Because cold booting may result in data loss, use this method only if all other recovery methods have failed. 110 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Note: Cold booting the computer does not guarantee that cached disk data will be saved, so transactional data may be lost during the reset. All other data, such as configuration and network settings, is preserved. To cold boot the mobile computer:

1 Press the Power button to suspend the computer. 2 Remove the handstrap and the battery pack. 3 Press the Reset button in the battery compartment on the back of the computer. 4 Replace the battery and the handstrap. The mobile computer boots. When the cold boot is complete, the Home screen appears. Location of CN70/CN70e Reset Button Reset button Location of CK70/CK71 Reset Button Reset button 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 111 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer Clean Booting the Computer A clean boot erases the memory in the mobile computer, including all applications and data files , with the exception of those found in the Flash File Store, or any removeable storage. If the computer seems to be locked up, try cold booting it. If this process does not work, use a clean boot to get the computer up and running for further troubleshooting. You can clean boot using the mobile computer, or you can clean boot using the SmartSystems Console:

To clean boot the mobile computer:

1 Remove the battery pack from the back of the computer. 2 With a stylus, press the Reset button in the battery cavity. 3 Insert the battery back into the computer, and immediately press and hold the Power button and Volume Down button

(the lower button on the right side). 4 Continue to hold the Power button and the Volume Down button down until you are prompted to release them. 5 Press the Volume Up button on the right side to start the clean boot. 6 Wait for the computer to load files from its ROM. To clean boot the computer using the SmartSystems Console, right click on the 70 Series computer and select Intermec Power Tools

> Clean Boot Device. Cleaning the Computer To keep the computer in good working order, you may need to clean the imager window, color camera window, and the touch screen. Clean the windows and the touch screen as often as needed for the environment in which you are using the computer. To clean the computer, use a solution of ammonia and water. 112 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer There are no user-serviceable parts inside the 70 Series computer. Opening the computer will void the warranty and may cause damage to the internal components. To clean the image window, camera window, and touch screen:

1 Press the Power button and choose to suspend the computer. 2 Dip a clean cloth towel in the ammonia solution and wring out the excess. 3 Wipe off the imager window, camera lens, and flash area. Do not allow any abrasive material to touch these surfaces. 4 Wipe dry. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 113 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting and Maintaining the Computer 114 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual A Specifications and Default Settings 115 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Physical and Environmental Specifications CN70 Physical Dimensions Dimensions 16.9 x 8.0 x 3.4 cm (6.66 x 3.14 x 1.35 in) Weight 450 g (15.2 oz) with battery CN70e Physical Dimensions Dimensions 19.5 x 8.0 x 3.4 cm (7.66 x 3.14 x 1.35 in) Weight 491 g (16.6 oz) with battery CK70 Physical Dimensions Dimensions 23.7 x 8.0 x 4.3 cm (9.33 x 3.16 x 1.69 in) Weight 562 g (19 oz) with battery CK71 Physical Dimensions Dimensions 23.7 x 8.0 x 5.0 cm (9.33 x 3.16 x 1.98 in) Weight 584 g (19.75 oz) with battery Environmental Specifications

-20C to 60C (-4F to 140F)

-30C to 70C (-22F to 158F) 0C to 45C (32F to 113F) Operating temperature Storage temperature Charging temperature Relative humidity (operating) 5% to 95% non-condensing Environmental rating Drop Specifications IP67 compliant All corners and sides from 1.8 m (6 ft) per MIL-STD 810F Power and Electrical Specifications Battery type Rechargeable Lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery 116 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Battery capacity CN70/CN70e: 3.7 V, 4000 mAh (14.8 Wh) CK70/CK71:

3.7 V, 5200 mAh (19.2 Wh) Electrical rating x 4.37/4.8 V; 2/1,5 A Operating System Microsoft Windows Embedded Handheld. Hardware Main processor Memory Persistent storage Removable storage Keypad Imaging options TI OMAP3, 600 MHz 512 MB RAM 1 GB Flash up to 32 GB user-accessible microSD card slot CN70: QWERTY, Numeric CN70e: QWERTY Numeric, Numeric CK70: Large Alpha, Alphanumeric CK71: Numeric Function, Alphanumeric 5 megapixel color camera and EA30 area imager

(all), EV12 (CK71 only), or EX25 (CK71 only) Back Accessory Interface Pin-outs The back accessory interface provides power for peripheral devices out the back of the CK70 and CK71 computers. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pin Name OTB_PWR GND OTB_RX OTB_TX OTB_I/O_Voltage OTB_ID OTB_RTS OTB_CTS I/O Output Description Power supply for peripheral DTE Data Receive Input Output DTE Data Transmit Input I/O Voltage Level BiDir One Wire Bus for ID Output DTE Ready do Send Input DTE Clear to Send 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 117 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Touch Screen Specifications Transmissive VGA display with high-durability touch screen; 480 x 640 pixels; 8.9 cm (3.5 in) diagonal active area; LED backlight and ambient light sensor. Standard Communications UMTS (not available on CK71) CDMA (not available on CK71) GPS (not available on CK71) Bluetooth USB high speed 2.0 OTG 802.11a/b/g/n Wireless LAN Standards compliant Data rates Security Certifications IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n (2.4 GHz and 5 GHz), Single Stream up to 72Mbps 802.11i, WPA, 802.1a/b/g/n, WEP

(EAP-TLS, TTLS, LEAP, PEAP, EAP-FAST WPA2 (Enterprise, Personal), WPA (Enterprise, Personal), Wi-Fi, WMM, WMM Power Save, Cisco Compatible Extensions (CCX 4.0) Regulatory Approvals FCC, CE, cULus Listed, DEMKO 118 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Bar Code Symbologies The imagers support all of the bar code symbologies listed in the next table. Supported Bar Code Symbologies AustraliaPost*

Aztec*

BPO*

Canada Post China Post Codabar Codablock A Codablock F Code 11 Code 39 Code 93 Code 128/GS1-128 DataMatrix*

Dutch Post*

EAN/UPC GS1 Composite*

GS1 DataBar Expanded GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataBar Omni-Directional Infomail Interleaved 2 of 5 Japan Post*

KoreanPost Matrix 2 of 5 Maxicode*

Micro PDF417*

MSI PDF417*

Planet*

Plessey Postnet*

QR Code*

Standard 2 of 5 SwedenPost Telepen TLC 39

* These symbologies are not supported with the EV12 imager in the CK71. Imager Reading Distances Typical reading distances are done in an office environment using office lights (4 lux). Minimum distances are measured in the dark (0 lux). Both reading distances are provided in respective scan engine integration guides. Contact your local Intermec representative for more information. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 119 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Below are the typical and minimum standard reading distances for the 70 Series computer built with an EA30 imager. Also included are typical and minimum standard reading distances for the CK71 with an EV12 or EX25 imager. Note: Minimum distances depend on the length of the bar code. EA30 Area Imager Minimum Reading Distances Minimum distances are measured in the dark (0 lux). 0"

4"

8"

12"

16"

20"

24"

28"

in 12"

8"

4"

0"

4"

8"

12"

Data Matrix 10 mils PDF417 10 mils 0.125mm/5 mils EAN/UPC 0.5 mm / 20 mils 1 mm / 40 mils 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 cm 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 120 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual EA30 Minimum Reading Distances Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Symbology Code 39 UPC/EAN 100%

Data Matrix PDF417 Minimum Distance 9.5 cm (3.74 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) 7 cm (2.76 in) 9.5 cm (3.74 in) 6 cm (2.36 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) 6.5 cm (2.56 in) 5.5 cm (2.17 in) 5.5 cm (2.17 in) 7 cm (2.76 in) Density 0.1 mm (4 mils) 0.1250 mm (5 mils) 0.5 mm (20 mils) 1 mm (40 mils) 0.33 mm (13.0 mils) 0.18 mm (7 mils) 0.25 mm (10 mils) 0.38 mm (15 mils) 0.25 mm (10 mils) 038 mm (15 mils) EA30 Area Imager Typical Reading Distances Typical distances are measured in an office environment (250 lux). Maximum Distance 10.5 cm (4.13 in) 14 cm (5.51 in) 45 cm (17.72 in) 62 cm (24.41 in) 31.5 cm (12.4 in) 15.5 cm (6.1 in) 21.5 cm (8.46 in) 31.5 cm (12.4 in) 25 cm (9.84 in) 34 cm (13.39 in) 0"

4"

8"

12"

16"

20"

24"

28"

32"

36"

in 12"

8"

4"

0"

4"

8"

12"

Data Matrix 10 mils PDF417 10 mils 0.125mm/5 mils EAN/UPC 0.5 mm / 20 mils 1 mm / 40 mils 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 cm 121 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings EA30 Typical Reading Distances Symbology Code 39 UPC/EAN 100%

Data Matrix PDF417 Density 0.1 mm (4 mils) 0.125 mm (5 mils) 0.5 mm (20 mils) 1 mm (40 mils) 0.33 mm (13.0 mils) 0.18 mm (7 mils) 0.25 mm (10 mils) 0.38 mm (15 mils) 0.25 mm (10 mils) 0.38 mm (15 mils) Minimum Distance 9.5 cm (3.74 in) 8 cm (3.15 in) 6.5 cm (2.56 in) 9.5 cm (3.74 in) 6 cm (2.36 in) 7.5 cm (2.95 in) 6 cm (2.36 in) 5.5 cm (2.17 in) 5.5 cm (2.17 in) 6.5 cm (2.56 in) Maximum Distance 11.5 cm (4.53 in) 14.5 cm (5.71 in) 50 cm (19.69 in) 75 cm (29.53 in) 34 cm (13.39 in) 16.5 cm (6.5 in) 23 cm (9.06 in) 34.5 cm (13.58 in) 26 cm (10.24 in) 37 cm (14.57 in) 122 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings EV12 Linear Imager Minimum Reading Distances The illustration below does not include the 0.12 cm (0.05 in) setback for the CK71. Minimum reading distances are measured in the dark (0 lux). 0"

in 2"

4"

6"

8"

10"

12"

14"

16"

8"

7"

6"

5"

4"

3"

2"

1"

0"

1"

2"

3"

4"

5"

6"

7"

8"

EAN/UPC 100%

0.125 mm / 5 mils 0.25 mm / 10 mils 0.5 mm / 20 mils 1 mm / 40 mils 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 cm 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 EV12 Miniumum Reading Distances With 0.12 cm (0.05 in) Setback Symbology Code 39 EAN/UPC Density 0.15 mm (6 mils) 0.25 mm (10 ils) 0.5 mm (20 mils) 1 mm (40 mils) 0.33 mm (13 mils) Minimum Distance 9.6 cm (3.8 in) 7.1 cm (2.9 in) 6.1 cm (2.5 in) 8.1 cm (3.2 in) 6.1 cm (2.5 in) Maximum Distance 17.9 cm (7.1 in) 20.9 cm (8.3 in) 26.9 cm (10.6 in) 33.9 cm (13.4 in) 22.9 cm (9.1 in) 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 123 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings EV12 LInear Imager Typical Reading Distances The illustration below does not include the 0.12 cm (0.05 in) setback for the CK71. Typical reading distances are measured in an office environment (200 lux). 0"

in 4"

8"

12"

16"

20"

24"

28"

32"

36"

16"

14"

12"

10"

8"

6"

4"

2"

0"

2"

4"

6"

8"

10"

12"

14"

16"

EAN/UPC 100%

0.125 mm / 5 mils 0.25 mm / 10 mils 0.5 mm / 20 mils 1 mm / 40 mils 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 cm 90 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40 EV12 Typical Reading Distances With 0.12 cm (0.05 in) Setback Symbology Code 39 EAN/UPC Density 0.15 mm (6 mils) 0.25 mm (10 ils) 0.5 mm (20 mils) 1 mm (40 mils) 0.33 mm (13 mils) Minimum Distance 9.6 cm (3.8 in) 6.1 cm (2.5 in) 5.1 cm (2.1 in) 7.1 cm (2.9 in)**

5.1 cm (2.1 in) Maximum Distance 19.9 cm (7.9 in) 24.9 cm (9.8 in) 34.9 cm (13.8 in) 50.9 cm (20.1 in) 27.9 cm (11.0 in)

** Minimum distance depends on bar code width and scan angle. 124 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings EX25 Near-Far Range Imager Minimum Reading Distance Minimum reading distances are measured in the dark (0 lux). The following graphic does not include the 0.24 cm (0.09 in) setback for the CK71. 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 in 80 64 48 32 16 0 16 32 48 64 80 100% EAN contrast UPC 0.25 mm/10 mils 0.5 mm/20 mils 1 mm/40 mils 1.4 mm/55 mils 200 160 120 80 40 0 40 80 120 160 200 cm 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 EX25 Minimum Reading Distances With 0.24 cm (0.09 in) Setback Symbology Code 39 EAN 100%

Density 0.08 mm (3 mils) 0.1 mm (2.8 mils) 0.25 mm (10 mils) 0.5 mm (20 mils) 1 mm (40 mils) 1.3 mm (51 mils) 0.33 mm (13 mils) Minimum Distance 15 cm (5.91 in) 15 cm (5.91 in) 15 cm (5.91 in) 16 cm (6.30 in) 25 cm (9.84 in) 40 cm (15.75 in) 15 cm (5.91 in) Maximum Distance 35 cm (13.78 in) 45 cm (17.72 in) 115 cm (45.28 in) 210 cm (82.68 in) 310 cm (122.05 in) 310 cm (122.05 in) 145 cm (57.09 in) 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 125 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings EX25 Near-Far Range Imager Typical Reading Distance Typical reading distances are measured in an office environment (200 lux). The following graphics do not include the 0.24 cm (0.09 in) setback for the CK71. EX25 Near-Far Range Imager 1D Typical Reading Distances 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 440 480 0 40 in 100% EAN contrast UPC 160 128 96 64 32 0 32 64 96 128 160 0.25 mm 10 mils 0.5 mm/20 mils 1 mm/40 mils 2.5 mm/100 mils 400 320 240 160 80 0 80 160 240 320 400 cm 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 EX25 1D Symbologies Typical Reading Distances With 0.24 cm (0.09 in) Setback Density 0.25 mm (10 mils) 0.5 mm (20 mils) 1 mm (40 mils) 1.4 mm (55 mils) 2.5 mm (100 mils) 2.5 mm (100 mils) Minimum Distance 15 cm (5.91 in) 16 cm (6.30 in) 25 cm (9.84 in) 40 cm (15.75 in)

Maximum Distance 135 cm (53.15 in) 280 cm (110.24 in) 550 cm (216.54 in) 720 cm (283.46 in) 1200 cm (472.44 in) 1300 cm (511.81 in) 0.33 mm (13 mils) 15 cm (5.91 in) 160 cm (62.99 in) 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Symbology Code 39 Code 128 retro-reflective EAN 100%

126 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings

** Minimum distance depends on bar code width and scan angle. EX25 Near-Far Range Imager 2D Typical Reading Distances 80 120 160 200 240 280 320 360 400 440 480 0 40 in 160 128 96 64 32 0 32 64 96 128 160 0.25 mm 10 mils 0.76 mm/30 mils 1.4 mm/55 mils 2.5 mm/100 mils 400 320 240 160 80 0 80 160 240 320 400 cm 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 EX25 2D Symbologies Typical Reading Distances With 0.24 cm (0.09 in) Setback Symbology DataMatrix Density 0.25 mm (10 mils) 0.76 mm (30 mils) 1.4 mm (55 mils) 2.5 mm (100 mils) 7.5 mm (300 mils) Minimum Distance 15 cm (5.91 in) 25 cm (9.84 in)

20 cm (7.87 in) Maximum Distance 90 cm (35.43 in) 310 cm (122.05 in) 450 cm (177.17 in) 1100 cm (433.07 in) 1524 cm (600 in)

** Minimum distance depends on bar code width and scan angle. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 127 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Default Configuration The following tables list the default values of the configuration settings supported on the mobile computer. If you restore the mobile computer to factory default settings, the mobile computer uses these values. The settings are grouped by function and reflect the organization of Intermec Settings. Not all of the configuration settings are listed in this appendix. For detailed information on most of the settings, see the Intermec Settings Command Reference Manual. Data Collection Settings Use data collection settings to configure the imager and to configure the bar codes that you want the imager to be able to read. Data Collection Settings Data Collection Setting Enable Scanner/Camera Port BT-Configure On Connect Enable Magstripe Reader Symbology Settings Symbology AustraliaPost Aztec BPO CanadaPost Codabar Codablock A Codablock F Code 11 Code 39 Code 93 Code 128/GS1-128 Default Value On Overwrite with computer settings Disable Default Value Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable 128 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Symbology DataMatrix DutchPost EAN/UPC GS1 Composite GS1 DataBar Expanded GS1 DataBar Limited GS1 DataBar Omni-Directional Infomail Intelligent Mail Interleaved 2 of 5 JapanPost Matrix 2 of 5 Maxicode Micro PDF417 MSI PDF417 Planet Plessey Postnet QR Code Standard 2 of 5 SwedenPost Telepen TLC 39 Symbology Option Settings Symbology Option Settings Preamble Postamble Symbology Identifier Multicode Default Value Enable Disable Enable UPC A, UPC E, EAN 8, EAN 13 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Default Value None (Disabled) None (Disabled) Disable Disable 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 129 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Scanner Settings Scanner Settings Trigger Predefined Modes Trigger Mode Aimer Mode Hardware Trigger Trigger Timeout (sec) Aiming Duration (msec) Turn Off After Good Read Imager Settings Imager Settings Predefined Modes Image File Location Signature Image Capture Document Imaging Image Capture Output Compression Output Compression Quality Edge Enhancement Noise Reduction Subsampling Image Rotation Image Lighting Correction Decode Security Settings Decode Security Settings Consecutive Data Validation Identical Consecutive Timeout Different Consecutive Timeout Center Decoding Center Decoding Tolerance Default Value Level Level Typical aimer Enable 2 500 Enable/One-shot Default Value 1D and 2D Standard

\My Documents\MDI Disable Disable JPEG 60 None 0 None None Disable Default Value 0 300 ms 0 Disable 0 130 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Communications Use communications settings to configure how the mobile computer communicates with the network. Communications Settings Communications Setting Device Name 802.11 Radio Settings 802.11 Radio Setting Security Choice Allow Security Changes Active Profile DHCP Import Root Certificates Import User Certificates Import Pac Files Radio Bands Radio Enabled Ethernet Adapter Settings Ethernet Adapter Setting DHCP Bluetooth Settings Bluetooth Setting Bluetooth Power WWAN Radio Settings WWAN Radio Setting WWAN Radio Enabled Default Value IntermecCXXX (where XXX indicates the model of mobile compuer) Default Value Funk Enabled Profile 1 Enabled False False False a/b/g (2.4 and 5.0 GHz) Off Default Value Enabled Default Value Off Default Value Disable 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 131 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Serial Port Switch Serial Port Switch Setting Serial Port Switch Device Settings Use device settings to configure settings on the mobile computer. Default Value Standard Docking and IrDA Device Settings Device Setting Date Time Beeper and Voice Headset Beeper Vibrate Mode Intensity Good Read Settings Good Read Setting Internal Scanner Good Read Beep Dock Tethered Scanner Bluetooth Scanner Good Read Beep Backlight Settings Backlight Setting Display Backlight Adjustment Keypad Backlight Light Level Screen Settings Screen Setting Screen Rotations Default Value Null Null Medium Very Low 1 Strong Pulse Default Value One Beep One Beep One Beep Default Value Normal On Based on Light Level Low Default Value Portrait 0 Degrees 132 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Keypad Settings Keypad Setting Scan Button Remapping Power Management Settings Power Management Setting Enable Power Button Screen Screen Options Displayed Screen Timeout (Seconds) Power Button Behavior Device Turns Off After (Battery Power) Screen Turns Off After (Battery Power) Device Turns Off After (External Power) Screen Turns Off After (External Power) Default Value Scanner Default Value On Hibernate, Suspend, Reboot 5 Suspend 5 minutes Disabled Disabled Disabled Compass Settings Compass Setting Magnetic Declination Magnetic Inclination Sensors Settings Sensors Setting Screen Rotation Device Off Profiles Settings Application Profiles Settings Camera Disable Camera Scan Enable Camera Scan Power Always On Maximize Battery Life Normal Default Value Use defaults Use defaults Default Value Disabled Disabled Default Value Show Option in Profile Settings Show Option in Profile Settings Show Option in Profile Settings Show Option in Profile Settings Show Option in Profile Settings 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 133 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Profiles Settings Scanning 1D Bar Codes Optimized Bright Sunlight Reflective Labels Standard Default Value Show Option in Profile Settings Show Option in Profile Settings Show Option in Profile Settings Show Option in Profile Settings GPS Settings Use GPS settings to configure how the mobile computer communicates with the GPS network. GPS GPS Setting Enable Bread Crumbing Core Messaging Service Settings Use core messaging service settings to configure the . Default Value Disable Core Messaging Service Core Messaging Service Setting Associated Server IP Broadcast Name Port Keep Alive Ping Interval Device Monitor Settings Use device monitor settings to configure how the mobile computer monitors the network. Default Value Null INTERMEC 62241 30 Seconds Device Health Controls Device Health Setting Enable Health Data Collection Enable Device Health Application Enable Blue Light Set Rule File Location Default Value On On Off for Ready-to-Work

\SmartSystems\HealthRules.txt 134 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings Device Health Setting System Device Health Refresh (seconds) 90 Network Device Health Refresh (seconds) 45 Default Value Device Health Screen Captures Device Health Screen Captures Setting Directory Screen Captures Allowed Default Value

\SmartSystems\ScreenCapture 3 Device Wipe Device Wipe Setting Enable Wipe Interval (in days) Virtual Wedge Settings Use virtual wedge settings to configure the virtual wedge. Default Value Disabled Null Virtual Wedge Setting Setting Virtual Wedge Bar Code Scanner Grid Label Encoding (Code Page) Magstripe Reader Grid Default Value Enable Null 1252 Null 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 135 Appendix A Specifications and Default Settings 136 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual B Keypads and Keystrokes 137 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Standard Characters Use the following tables to learn how to enter standard and other available characters and functions with the keypad. If there is no sequence of keystrokes for a particular character or function, it is only available through the soft input panel (SIP), which you can access by tapping the keyboard icon on the touch screen. CN70 Keypads and Keystrokes CN70 Alphanumeric Characters Numeric Keypad c 2 c 2 2 c 2 2 2 c 3 c 3 3 c 3 3 3 c 4 c 4 4 c 4 4 4 c 5 c 5 5 c 5 5 5 c 6 c 6 6 c 6 6 6 Character a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o 138 QWERTY Keypad A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Character p q r s t u v w x y z A B C D E F G H I J Numeric Keypad c 7 c 7 7 c 7 7 7 c 7 7 7 7 c 8 c 8 8 c 8 8 8 c 9 c 9 9 c 9 9 9 c 9 9 9 9 c 1 2 c 1 2 2 c 1 2 2 2 c 1 3 c 1 3 3 c 1 3 3 3 c 1 4 c 1 4 4 c 1 4 4 4 c 1 5 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes QWERTY Keypad P Q R S T U V W X Y Z y A y B y C y D y E y F y G y H y I y J 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 139 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Character K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 Numeric Keypad c 1 5 5 c 1 5 5 5 c 1 6 c 1 6 6 c 1 6 6 6 c 1 7 c 1 7 7 c 1 7 7 7 c 1 7 7 7 7 c 1 8 c 1 8 8 c 1 8 8 8 c 1 9 c 1 9 9 c 1 9 9 9 c 1 9 9 9 9 0 1 2 3 4 QWERTY Keypad y K y L y M y N y O y P y Q y R y S y T y U y V y W y X y Y y Z b , b Y b U b I b H 140 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Numeric Keypad QWERTY Keypad Character 5 6 7 8 9 5 6 7 8 9 CN70 Characters and Functions To Enter

@ (at symbol)

& (ampersand)

* (asterisk)

: (colon)

, (comma)

$ (dollar)

! (exclamation)

- (hyphen)

% (percent)

. (period)

+ (plus)

# (pound)

? (question mark)

(apostrophe) Numeric Keypad N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A

. b -

N/A N/A b J b K b B b N b M QWERTY Keypad b Q b S b C b D b X b E b O b G b R

. b T b V b A b Z 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 141 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Numeric Keypad QWERTY Keypad To Enter Forward Tab Backspace Up Arrow Down Arrow Left Arrow Right Arrow CapsLock Enter ok Shift Space j

u d l r c 1 e b |

b or c c 0 Start (Windows) b m or c m Esc Talk End Call Intermec Dashboard

p w m j

u d l r y y e b P b or y s b m

p w m 142 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual CN70e Keypads and Keystrokes CN70e Alphanumeric Characters Character a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s Numeric Keypad c 2 c 2 2 c 2 2 2 c 3 c 3 3 c 3 3 3 c 4 c 4 4 c 4 4 4 c 5 c 5 5 c 5 5 5 c 6 c 6 6 c 6 6 6 c 7 c 7 7 c 7 7 7 c 7 7 7 7 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes QWERTY Numeric Keypad A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 143 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Character t u v w x y z A B C D E F G H I J K L M N Numeric Keypad c 8 c 8 8 c 8 8 8 c 9 c 9 9 c 9 9 9 c 9 9 9 9 c 1 2 c 1 2 2 c 1 2 2 2 c 1 3 c 1 3 3 c 1 3 3 3 c 1 4 c 1 4 4 c 1 4 4 4 c 1 5 c 1 5 5 c 1 5 5 5 c 1 6 c 1 6 6 QWERTY Numeric Keypad T U V W X Y Z y A y B y C y D y E y F y G y H y I y J y K y L y M y N 144 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Character O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Numeric Keypad QWERTY Numeric Keypad c 1 6 6 6 c 1 7 c 1 7 7 c 1 7 7 7 c 1 7 7 7 7 c 1 8 c 1 8 8 c 1 8 8 8 c 1 9 c 1 9 9 c 1 9 9 9 c 1 9 9 9 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 y O y P y Q y R y S y T y U y V y W y X y Y y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 145 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Character 9 Numeric Keypad 9 CN70e Characters and Functions To Enter

@ (at symbol)

& (ampersand)

* (asterisk)

: (colon)

, (comma)

$ (dollar)

! (exclamation)

- (hyphen)

% (percent)

. (period)

+ (plus)

# (pound)

? (question mark)

(apostrophe) Forward Tab Backspace Up Arrow Down Arrow Numeric Keypad N/A N/A

N/A N/A N/A N/A

N/A

. b -

N/A N/A j

u d QWERTY Numeric Keypad 9 QWERTY Numeric Keypad b Q b U

b I

, b E b O

b R

. b -

b Y b W j

u d 146 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Numeric Keypad QWERTY Numeric Keypad To Enter Left Arrow Right Arrow CapsLock Enter ok Shift Space l r c 1 e b |

b or c c 0 Start (Windows) b m or c m Esc Talk End Call Intermec Dashboard

p w m CK70 Keypads and Keystrokes CK70 Alphanumeric Characters l r y y e b |

b or y s b m

p w m Character a b c d e f Large Alpha Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad A B C D E F A B C D E F 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 147 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Character g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z A Large Alpha Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z y A y A 148 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Character B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Large Alpha Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad y B y C y D y E y F y G y H y I y J y K y L y M y N y O y P y Q y R y S y T y U y V y B y C y D y E y F y G y H y I y J y K y L y M y N y O y P y Q y R y S y T y U y V 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 149 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Character W X Y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Large Alpha Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad y W y X y Y y Z bP bD bE bF bG bH bI bK bL bM y W y X y Y y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CK70 Characters and Functions To Enter

@ (at symbol)

& (ampersand)

* (asterisk)

: (colon)

; (semicolon) Large Alpha Keypad bS b W b O b J c J Alphanumeric Keypad N/A b U b 0 b 2 b 5 150 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual To Enter

, (comma)

$ (dollar)

! (exclamation)

- (hyphen or minus)

% (percent)

. (period)

+ (plus)

# (pound)

? (question mark)

(apostrophe)

= (equals) _ (underscore)

> (greater than)

< (less than)

[ (left square bracket)

] (right square bracket)

{ (left curly brace)

} (right curly brace)

~ (tilde)

\ (backslash)

/ (forward slash) Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Large Alpha Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad b T c S c W c X c O

. b X b Q c Q c T b Y c Y c N b N b V c V N/A N/A N/A c U b U c X N/A N/A c s N/A

. b s c 0 c Y b Y b S c X c V b V b T c T b U c U b W c 8 b 8 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 151 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes To Enter

(quotes)

( (left parenthesis)

) (right parenthesis) Insert Delete Sym

(broken vertical bar)

(grave) Forward Tab Backspace Up Arrow Down Arrow Left Arrow Right Arrow CapsLock Enter ok Shift Space Large Alpha Keypad N/A b R c R b Z c Z b s N/A N/A j

u d l r y y e c m y s Alphanumeric Keypad b Z N/A N/A b 4 b 6 N/A c S c W j

u d l r y y e c m y s Start (Windows) b m or c m b m or c m Esc 152

70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual To Enter Alt Ctrl Send Call End Call Intermec Dashboard CK70 Function Keys To Enter F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Large Alpha Keypad N/A Ctrl Alphanumeric Keypad Alt Ctrl b A b C m c 1 c 3 m Large Alpha Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad c D c E c F c G c H c I c K c L c M c P N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A b b b b b b A b B b C b D b E 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 153 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes To Enter F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 Large Alpha Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A b F b G b H b I b J b K b L b M b N CK71 Keypads and Keystrokes CK71 Alphanumeric Characters Character a b c d e f g h i 154 Numeric With Function Keys Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad b 7 b 8 b 9 b 4 b 5 b 6 b 1 b 2 b 3 A B C D E F G H I 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Character j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z A B C D Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Numeric With Function Keys Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad b 0 b -

b b b b b b b b b b b b b m b Ctrl b Alt b y 7 b y 8 b y 9 b y 4 J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z y A y B y C y D 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 155 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Character E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y 156 Numeric With Function Keys Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad b y 5 b y 6 b y 1 b y 2 b y 3 b y 0 b y -

b y b y b y b y b y b y b y b y b y b y b y b y b y m b y Ctrl y E y F y G y H y I y J y K y L y M y N y O y P y Q y R y S y T y U y V y W y X y Y 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Character Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Numeric With Function Keys Keypad b y Alt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CK71 Characters and Functions Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Alphanumeric Keypad y Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Numeric With Function Keys Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad To Enter

: (colon)

; (semicolon)

, (comma)

$ (dollar)

! (exclamation) c s N/A N/A c S c W

- (hyphen or minus) -

. (period)

+ (plus) N/A b 8 b 5 c X N/A N/A c s

. b s 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 157 Numeric With Function Keys Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes To Enter

(apostrophe)

= (equals) _ (underscore)

> (greater than)

< (less than) N/A N/A c -

N/A N/A

[ (left square bracket) N/A

] (right square bracket) N/A N/A

{ (left curly brace) N/A N/A c Alt c Ctrl N/A b l c 4 N/A N/A j

u d

} (right curly brace)

~ (tilde)

\ (backslash)

/ (forward slash)

(quotes) Insert Delete

(broken vertical bar)

(grave) Forward Tab Backspace Up Arrow Down Arrow 158 b Y b S c X c V b V b T c T b U c U b W c 2 b 2 b Z b 4 b 6 c S c W j

u d 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual To Enter Left Arrow Right Arrow CapsLock Enter ok Shift Space Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes Numeric With Function Keys Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad l r y y e c m y s l r y y e c m y s Start (Windows) b m or c m b m or c m Esc Alt

Alt Ctrl Ctrl Intermec Dashboard m CK71 Function Keys

b |

Ctrl m To Enter F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 Numeric With Function Keys Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad b b 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 159 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes To Enter F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24 Numeric With Function Keys Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad c c c c c c c c c c c c b b b b A b B b C b D b E b F b G b H b I b J b K b L b M b N 160 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual CK71 Intermec Terminal Emulation (ITE) Keys Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes To Enter Attention Autolog Clear Duplicate EEOF Erase Find Field +

Field -

Fieldmark Help Hex Home Keypad Menu Mode New Line Next Screen PA1 PA2 Numeric With Function Keys Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad c 0 N/A b 6 N/A N/A N/A N/A c x b x N/A N/A N/A c . N/A N/A N/A N/A c 9 c 1 c 2 c A c c 6 c D c c E c F c 1 c 1 c G b 3 c I c H c K c M c O c N b 9 c c 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 161 Appendix B Keypads and Keystrokes To Enter PA3 Page Print Previous Screen Remove Reset Return Roll Down Roll Up System Request View View Down View Up Numeric With Function Keys Keypad Alphanumeric Keypad c 3 c d N/A c 7 N/A c |

c e c 5 c 8 b r N/A b d b u c c d c P c 7 c R c |

c e c 5 c 8 c Q b d N/A N/A 162 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual C ScanNGo Wi-Fi Configuration Bar Codes You can use the ScanNGo Wi-Fi configuration bar codes to quickly configure the 802.11 radio in your computer. 163 Appendix C ScanNGo Wi-Fi Configuration Bar Codes Radio Configuration Bar Codes Use the following ScanNGo bar codes to enable the 802.11 radio and set the defaults for either Funk or Microsoft Wireless Zero Configuration security. After you scan the bar codes, you will still need to use Intermec Settings or another configuration program to set network-specific settings on your computer and to configure the wireless security. The CN70, CN70e, and CK70 are available with the EA30 imager only. The CK71 has three imager options: the EA30, EX25, or EV12 imager. If your CK71 has an EA30 or EX25 imager, use the 2D configuration bar codes to configure the radio. If your CK71 has an EV12 imager, use the 1D configuration bar codes to configure the radio. You can find out what imager is in your CK71 by opening Intermec Settings and tapping Data Collection > Internal Scanner > Scanner Settings. The following ScanNGo bar codes were created using SmartSystems Foundation. For more information on SmartSystems Foundation, see Managing the Computer Using SmartSystems on page 92. 2D Configuration Bar Codes Follow these directions to configure the computer with a 2D imager

(EA30 or EX25):

1 Scan the appropriate bar code from the table and wait for the program to start. 2 Follow any instructions on the device. 164 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix C ScanNGo Wi-Fi Configuration Bar Codes 2D Imager Radio Configuration Bar Codes To Configure These Settings:

Scan This Bar Code Enable Wi-Fi - set Funk defaults Enable Wi-Fi radio - set Microsoft WZC defaults 1D Configuration Bar Codes Follow these directions to configure the computer with a 1D imager

(EV12):

1) Scan the START HERE bar code from the table and wait for the program to start. 2) Scan the bar code labeled 1/13 or 1/20 depending of the wireless security you want to use. 3) Scan the rest of the bar codes in any order. 4) Follow any instructions on the device. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 165 Appendix C ScanNGo Wi-Fi Configuration Bar Codes 1D Imager Radio Configuration Bar Codes To Configure These Settings:

Scan This Bar Code Enable Wi-Fi - set Funk defaults 166 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix C ScanNGo Wi-Fi Configuration Bar Codes To Configure These Settings:

Scan This Bar Code Enable Wi-Fi - set Funk defaults

(continued) 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 167 Appendix C ScanNGo Wi-Fi Configuration Bar Codes To Configure These Settings:

Scan This Bar Code Enable Wi-Fi - set Funk defaults

(continued) Enable Wi-Fi radio - set Microsoft WZC defaults 168 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix C ScanNGo Wi-Fi Configuration Bar Codes To Configure These Settings:

Scan This Bar Code Enable Wi-Fi radio - set Microsoft WZC defaults (continued) 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 169 Appendix C ScanNGo Wi-Fi Configuration Bar Codes To Configure These Settings:

Scan This Bar Code Enable Wi-Fi radio - set Microsoft WZC defaults (continued) 170 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Appendix C ScanNGo Wi-Fi Configuration Bar Codes To Configure These Settings:

Scan This Bar Code Enable Wi-Fi radio - set Microsoft WZC defaults (continued) 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 171 Appendix C ScanNGo Wi-Fi Configuration Bar Codes 172 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual I Index 173 Index Symbols

.cab files, using to install applications 94 Numerics 70 Series computer models 2 features 4 802.11 communications, configuring 71 802.11 network status troubleshooting 105 802.11 radio, default settings 131 802.1x security configuring with Funk 82 configuring with Microsoft 86 troubleshooting 104 with Funk 82 A accessories, described 7 activation wizard, starting 51 ActiveSync downloading 99 establishing a partnership 33 using to install applications 95 aligning the screen 41 alpha with numeric keypad illustrated 17 keypresses, listed 147154 illustrated 17 keypresses, listed 147162 alphanumeric keypad applications Resource Kits 93 developing with Intermec installing with a storage card 95 installing with ActiveSync 95 installing with Console 94 Intermec 42 Intermec, available for download Intermec, available on computer launching automatically 95 packaging 94 troubleshooting 110 42 43 Bluetooth 75 ASCII scanner, connecting 76 audio device, connecting with audio snap-on adapter, described 7 AutoRun, description 94 AutoRun.exe, using to start application 95 B back accessory interface pin-outs 117 backlight bar code configuring screen 24 keypad behavior 17 default symbology settings 128 reading 26 reading, troubleshooting 107 symbologies 119 bar codes, radio configuration 164 battery about 8 battery icons, described 12 charging 9 charging accessories 9 checking the status 12 conserving battery life 14 descriptions 7 status LED 13 audio device, connecting to 75 printer, connecting to 74 scanner, connecting to 72 Bluetooth Audio application Bluetooth Bluetooth communications, description 42 configuring 7275 C calling product support 109 camera description 54 CDMA phone activating 50 carriers 50 certificate, loading 88 changing the battery 9 174 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual characters 22 entering on CK70/CK71 keypad entering on numeric keypad 21 entering on QWERTY keypad 20 entering with keystrokes 138 charging accessories, battery 9 charging the battery 9 CK70 keypads, illustrated 17 status LEDs 5, 6 battery, described 7 entering characters on keypad CK70/CK71 magstripe reader adapter, 22 described 7 CK71 keypads, illustrated 17 status LEDs 6 clean boot, performing 112 cleaning computer 112 CN70 keypads, illustrated 15 status LEDs 5 vehicle dock, described 8 vehicle holder, described 8 CN70/CN70e CN70/CN70e battery, described 7 cold boot, performing 110 communications 802.11, configuring 71 Bluetooth, configuring 7275 default settings 131 Ethernet, configuring 71 serial 75 USB 75 configuration number, finding 109 configuring parameters 62 conserving battery life 14 Console using to install applications 94 applications 94 Console, using to install contact information, Intermec ii D Dashboard about the button 24 button, using 102 description 102 Index illustration 102 launching 24 default settings bar code symbologies 128 communications 131 imager 130 listed 128135 restoring Intermec Settings 69 scanner 130 desktop stand, described 7 DX1 desktop dock, described 7 DX2 dual dock, described 7 DX4 quad dock, described 7 E EA30 area imager, reading electrial specifications 116 eMDI, description 43 emergency phone call, making with distances 120 computer 52 Enhanced Mobile Document Imaging (eMDI) application, description 43 environmental specifications 116 Ethernet communications, configuring snap-on adapter, described 7 71 32 distances 123 EV12 linear imager, reading EX25 imager, reading distances 125 F Features Demo, description 43 features of 70 Series 4 files, transferring to and from PC fix interval, configuring with iGPS flick, screen gesture described 38 Funk security 802.1x 82 configuring 802.1x 82 configuring static WEP 83 configuring WPA Enterprise configuring WPA Personal (PSK)

(802.1x) 80 60 configuring WPA2 Enterprise 81

(802.1x) 80 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 175 Index Funk security (continued)

(PSK) 81 configuring WPA2 Personal profile, choosing 80 using open (no security) associations 83 GPS G gestures, supported 37 Good Read LED description 6 troubleshooting 107 configuring 58 GPSID, overview 58 improving performance 59 overview 58 GPSID (GPS Intermediate Driver) gpsOneXTRA, description 59 H handstrap replacement kit, hard reset, performing 110 health, monitoring computer 102 Hibernate (battery swap), description 23 holster, described 8 Home screen, understanding 36 horizontal scroll bar described 8 description 36 illustration 36 I IDL (Intermec Developer Library) 93 iGPS application description 42 using to improve performance 59 Image Capture, description 44 Image Update silently updating system using to update system software software 98 97 imager default settings 130 reading distances 119127 Intermec Browser, description 44 Intermec Connection Manager, description 44 93 Intermec Dashboard, about 102 Intermec Developer Library (IDL) Intermec Launcher, description 44 Intermec Resource Kits described 93 downloading 93 Intermec Settings application, description 42 command reference manual link described 62 hiding menu items 69 main menu illustration 63 menu options 6367 navigating in 68 restoring default settings 69 restoring menu items 69 starting 63 understanding structure 63 using remotely with 67 using to configure Profile SmartSystems 70 Settings 68 Intermec, contact information ii Internet Service Provider (ISP) connection, creating 76 application description 42 diagnosing Wi-Fi status 105 ISpyWiFi K Key status LED, description 6 keypad backlight behavior 15, 17 keystrokes for entering characters 138 keypads illustrated 15 troubleshooting keys 108 Knowledge Central web site 109 L launching applications automatically 95 LEDs battery status, described 13 status descriptions 6 locked computer, troubleshooting 108 176 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual M magstripe reader adapter, described 7 description 7 magstripe reader snap-on adapter, memory, computer 117 microSD card about 27 installing in a CK70/CK71 30 installing in a CN70/CN70e 27 choosing 84 configuring 802.1x 86 configuring static WEP 87 configuring WPA Enterprise configuring WPA Personal (PSK)

(802.1x) 84 Microsoft security configuring WPA2 Enterprise configuring WPA2 Personal 85

(802.1x) 84

(PSK) 85 associations 87 using open (no security) models of 70 Series computers 2 MS Assisted mode, description 59 N network connection, Notification LED, description 6 numeric function keypad, troubleshooting 103 illustrated 17 numeric keypad entering characters on 21 illustrated 15 keypresses, listed 138147 keypresses, listed 154162 numeric with function keys keypad O open associations, configuring with open associations, configuring with Funk 83 Microsoft WZC 87 operating system finding version 110 version 2 Index P pan, screen gesture described 38 phone CDMA, activating 50 features 48 making a call 52 making an emergency call 52 turning on and off 51 UMTS, activating 48 physical specifications 116 picture saving to an SD card 55 storage location 54 taking with camera 54 pin-outs, back accessory interface Power button, description of 117 behavior 22 power options customizing 24 setting 22 26 power specifications 116 predefined imager mode, choosing printer, connecting with Bluetooth problems, troubleshooting 108 processor, computer 117 product support calling 109 Knowledge Central web site 109 74 product support, calling 109 Profile Settings application description 42 configuring with Intermec Settings 68 profile, choosing Funk security 80 Q QWERTY keypad entering characters on 20 illustrated 15 keypresses, listed 138147 R reading bar codes 26 reading distances EA30 area imager 120 EV12 linear imager 123 EX25 imager 125 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 177 Index Ready-to-Work LED, description 6 reboot performing 110 power option description 24 recording a video 55 regulatory approvals 118 Reset button, location 111 reset, performing 110 RS-232 snap-on adapter, described 8 S scan handle, described 8 scanner Bluetooth, connecting to 72 default settings 130 supported tethered and cordless tethered scanner, connecting 76 troubleshooting 108 26 SD card, using to save pictures and ScanNGo radio configuration bar screen codes 164 aligning 41 backlight, configuring 24 brightness, configuring 25 gestures 37 no response, troubleshooting specifications 118 description 24 videos 55 security, wireless Screen Off, power option 802.1x with Funk 82 choosing Funk or WZC 79 108 description 24 serial communications, about 75 settings, default, listed 128135 Shift status LED, description 6 Shutdown, power option silently updating system software SIM card, installing 48 SmartSystems Foundation console, illustration 92 Console, using to install applications 94 description 45 98 102 downloading 45, 93 monitoring computer health ScanNGo description 93 updating system software 97 using the Console to install using to manage computer 92 using with remote Intermec applications 94 Settings 70 specifications, physical and environmental 116 status icons, Title bar 38 status LEDs CK70 5 CN70 5 descriptions 6 storage card, using to install applications 95 storage, computer 117 Suspend, power option description symbologies, supported 119 system software 23 updating with SmartSystems updating 97 Foundation 97 T terminal emulation, tethered scanner, connecting 76 tethered stylus replacement kit, troubleshooting 103 Tile bar described 8 description 36 illustration 36 description 36 illustration 36 status icon descriptions 38 Title bar transferring files, to and from PC troubleshooting 103108 32 802.11 network status 105 802.1x security 104 operation 108 reading bar codes 107 Wi-Fi connection 103 turning on or off phone 51, 52 178 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual individual 99 U UMTS phone, activating 48 update packages, installing USB communictions, about 75 USB snap-on adapter, described 8 V vehicle dock accessories, described 8 vehicle holder, described 8 video recording 55 saving to an SD card 55 Virtual Private Network (VPN) connection, creating 78 volume, adjusting 25 W Wavelink Avalanche, downloading the enabler 93 WEP static, configuring with Funk 83 static, configuring with supported 4 Microsoft 87 WiFi communications Wi-Fi radio, enabling 71 Wi-Fi, troubleshooting 103 Windows Embedded Handheld, user interface 36 Windows Mobile Device Center downloading 99 wireless connectivity, troubleshooting 103 Wireless Center application description 42 description 43 Wireless Printing application Index description 43 Wireless Scanning application wireless security 7989 802.1x with Funk 82 certificate, loading 88 choosing Funk or WZC 79 configuration bar codes 164 Wireless Zero Configuration

(WZC), selecting security choice 84 WPA Enterprise (802.1x) security, configuring with Funk 80 Enterprise (802.1x) security, configuring with Microsoft 84 configuring with Funk 81 Personal (PSK) security, Personal (PSK) security, configuring with Microsoft 85 Enterprise (802.1x) security, configuring with Funk 80 Enterprise (802.1x) security, configuring with Microsoft 84 configuring with Funk 81 Personal (PSK) security, WPA2 Personal (PSK) security, configuring with Microsoft 85 www.intermec.com Knowledge Central 109 manuals, downloading ix, xi Product Support 109 warranty information ix 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual 179 Index 180 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2011 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. 70 Series Mobile Computer Users Manual

*935-038-001*

P/N 935-038-001